Cadillac Automobile 2009 CTS User Manual

2009 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This manual includes the latest information at the time it  
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes  
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold  
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors  
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division  
wherever it appears in this manual.  
Propriétaires Canadiens  
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français  
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
This manual describes features that may or may not be  
on your specific vehicle.  
1-800-551-4123  
www.helminc.com  
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about  
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,  
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.  
Index  
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.  
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the  
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical  
list of what is in the manual and the page number where  
it can be found.  
Canadian Owners  
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained  
from your dealer/retailer or from:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
1-800-551-4123  
www.helminc.com  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A notice tells about something that can damage the  
vehicle.  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
A circle with a slash  
through it is a safety  
Notice: These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
symbol which means  
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the  
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice  
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use  
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.  
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about  
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore  
the warning.  
Vehicle Symbols  
The vehicle has components and labels that use  
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along  
with the text describing the operation or information  
relating to a specific component, control, message,  
gage, or indicator.  
{ CAUTION:  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your  
owner manual for additional instructions or information.  
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a  
service manual for additional instructions or information.  
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid  
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Symbol Chart  
. : Fuel Gage  
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on  
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information  
on the symbol, refer to the index.  
+ : Fuses  
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
j : LATCH System Child Restraints  
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
: : Oil Pressure  
9 : Airbag Readiness Light  
# : Air Conditioning  
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®  
$ : Brake System Warning Light  
" : Charging System  
} : Power  
/ : Remote Vehicle Start  
> : Safety Belt Reminders  
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor  
F : Traction Control  
I : Cruise Control  
B : Engine Coolant Temperature  
O : Exterior Lamps  
M : Windshield Washer Fluid  
# : Fog Lamps  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint System  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Head Restraints  
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints  
in the outboard seating positions.  
The vehicle’s rear seats have head restraints in the  
outboard seating positions, but they are not adjustable.  
{ CAUTION:  
With head restraints that are not installed and  
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that  
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a  
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for  
all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint  
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.  
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a  
crash.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pull the head restraint up  
to raise it. To lower the  
head restraint, press the  
button, located on the top  
of the seatback, and push  
the restraint down.  
Push down on the head restraint after the button is  
released to make sure that it is locked in place.  
The vehicle’s head restraints are not designed to be  
removed.  
Active Head Restraint System  
On vehicles with an active head restraint system in the  
front outboard seating positions, the head restraints  
automatically tilt forward to reduce the risk of neck injury  
if the vehicle is hit from behind.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:  
1. Lift the bar to unlock  
Front Seats  
the seat.  
Manual Seats  
2. Slide the seat to the  
desired position and  
release the bar.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat  
is locked in place.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Leg Extension  
Power Seats  
On vehicles with power seats, the controls are located  
on the outboard side of the seats.  
On vehicles with this feature, adjust the manual leg  
extension by reaching under it, in the pocketed area.  
Press the release button and pull or push to lengthen  
or shorten it. Release the button to lock it in place.  
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the  
horizontal control forward or rearward.  
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by  
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by  
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.  
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters  
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire  
horizontal control up or down.  
The vertical control is used for reclining the seatback.  
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining  
Seatbacks on page 1-10 for more information.  
Power Lumbar  
The vehicle may have  
this feature. The driver  
and passenger seatback  
lumbar support can be  
adjusted by moving the  
control located on the  
outboard side of the  
seat cushions.  
A. Seat Cushion Bolster Adjustment Switch  
B. Lumbar Support Control Switch  
C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment Switch  
To increase or decrease support, hold the control  
forward or rearward. Adjust the seat as needed.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Lumbar  
Heated and Ventilated Seats  
On vehicles with this feature:  
On vehicles with this feature, the buttons are located on  
the climate control panel.  
Press and hold the top of the control (B) to increase  
support to the top of the seatback and decrease  
support to the bottom of the lumbar.  
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to heat the  
seat and seatback.  
Press and hold the bottom of the control to  
decrease support to the top of the seatback and  
increase support to the bottom of the seatback.  
{ (Ventilated Seat): Press to ventilate the seat.  
A light bar in the climate control display shows the  
setting; high, medium, or low.  
Press and hold the front or rear of the control to  
increase or decrease support to the entire seatback.  
Press either button to start that feature at the highest  
setting. Each press of the button, decreases the setting.  
Side Bolster  
To turn the feature off, press the button until the light  
turns off.  
On vehicles with this feature:  
Press the top or bottom of control (A) to increase or  
decrease support in seat cushion bolsters.  
The heated or ventilated seats shut off when the vehicle  
is turned off.  
Press the top or bottom of the control (C) to  
increase or decrease support in the seatback  
bolsters.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be in  
P (Park) for an automatic transmission or the parking  
brake applied for a manual transmission. Press and  
release either button 1 or button 2. A single beep will  
sound. The seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will  
move to the position previously stored for the identified  
driver.  
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering  
Wheel  
On vehicles with the memory package the controls  
are located on the driver door. This feature is used to  
program and recall memory settings for the driver seat,  
outside mirror, and the steering wheel position if the  
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering  
feature.  
If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to  
enter the vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is  
on, automatic seat and mirror movement occur.  
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.  
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.  
On vehicles with the Keyless Access System, automatic  
adjustment occurs when the driver door is opened.  
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any  
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory  
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror  
buttons.  
S : Recalls the easy exit position.  
To save your positions in memory:  
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback recliner and  
lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the steering  
wheel to a comfortable position.  
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound  
through the driver side front speaker to let you  
know that the position has been stored.  
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using  
button 2.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If something has blocked the driver seat or the steering  
column while recalling a memory position, the recall may  
stop. Remove the obstruction, then press the appropriate  
control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds.  
Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the  
appropriate memory button. If the memory position is  
still not recalling, see your dealer/retailer for service.  
On vehicles with the Keyless Access System, automatic  
adjustment occurs when the ignition is turned to OFF  
and the driver door is opened.  
A single beep sounds. The driver seat moves back, and  
if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic  
steering feature, it moves up and forward.  
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71 for more information.  
Easy Exit Recall  
For more programming information, see DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71.  
S : With the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic  
transmission or the parking brake applied for a manual  
transmission, press the exit button to recall the exit  
position.  
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic  
seat and power telescopic steering column movement  
occurs when the key is removed from the ignition.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reclining Seatbacks  
{ CAUTION:  
Manual Reclining Seatbacks  
If either seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they  
are locked.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
If the front passenger seat has a manual reclining  
seatback, the lever used to operate it is located on the  
outboard side of the seat.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To recline the seatback:  
Power Reclining Seatbacks  
1. Lift the recline lever.  
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, use the  
vertical power seat control located on the outboard side  
of each seat.  
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then  
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is  
locked.  
To return the seatback to an upright position:  
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the  
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright  
position.  
To recline the seatback, press the control toward  
the rear of the vehicle.  
To raise the seatback, press the control toward the  
front of the vehicle.  
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is  
locked.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is  
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle  
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you  
are reclined like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,  
you could go into it, receiving neck or other  
injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash  
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt  
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.  
This could cause serious internal injuries.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is  
moving.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,  
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the  
seat and wear your safety belt properly.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See Trunk on page 2-20 for more information.  
Rear Seats  
To return the seatback to the upright position:  
Split Folding Rear Seat  
{ CAUTION:  
The vehicle may have a split folding rear seat.  
To lower one or both of the rear seatbacks:  
If either seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they  
are locked.  
1. Pull forward on the tab,  
located on the outboard  
side of the seatback,  
to unlock the seatback.  
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.  
2. Make sure the seatback is locked into place  
by pushing and pulling on it.  
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.  
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in  
the upright, locked position.  
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts  
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or  
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts  
and return them to their normal stowed position  
before folding a rear seat.  
2. Fold the seatback down. This allows access to  
the trunk.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belts  
{ CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people  
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats  
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is  
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.  
This section of the manual describes how to use  
safety belts properly. It also describes some things  
not to do with safety belts.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot  
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your  
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the  
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things  
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the  
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be  
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you  
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten  
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)  
are restrained properly too.  
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the  
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-34  
for additional information.  
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law  
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have  
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so  
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.  
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,  
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk  
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly  
hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,  
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter... a lot!  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as  
it goes.  
Put someone on it.  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on  
wheels.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider  
does not stop.  
The person keeps going until stopped by something.  
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or the instrument panel...  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,  
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why  
safety belts make such good sense.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a  
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and  
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver  
does not protect you from things beyond your  
control, such as bad drivers.  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I  
am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety  
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious  
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle  
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.  
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you  
are upside down.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less  
than 40 mph (65 km/h).  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to  
wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they  
work with safety belts — not instead of them.  
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants  
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.  
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but  
especially in side and other collisions.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
This section is only for people of adult size.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for  
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the  
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-33 or Infants and  
Young Children on page 1-36. Follow those rules for  
everyone’s protection.  
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.  
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often  
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.  
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out  
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others  
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.  
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety  
belt, there is important information you should know.  
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in  
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low  
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,  
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you  
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid  
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.  
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The  
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across  
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take  
belt restraining forces.  
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop  
or crash.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too  
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder  
belt should fit snugly against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as  
much protection this way.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too  
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap  
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could  
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt  
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as  
much protection this way.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled  
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt  
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces  
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This  
could cause serious internal injuries. Always  
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over  
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too  
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.  
The belt force would then be applied on the  
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that  
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure  
the belt goes under the armrests.  
A: The belt is over an armrest.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury.  
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the  
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.  
You could also severely injure internal organs like  
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go  
over the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should  
be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the  
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would  
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body  
could move too far forward increasing the chance  
of head and neck injury. You might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The belt is behind the body.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a  
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt  
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make  
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your  
dealer/retailer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
All seating positions in the vehicle have a  
lap-shoulder belt.  
The following instructions explain how to wear a  
lap-shoulder belt properly.  
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can  
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the  
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the  
belt across you more slowly.  
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled  
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature  
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt  
go back all the way and start again.  
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 1-32.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,  
move it to the height that is right for you. See  
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this  
section for use and important safety information.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should return to its stowed position.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety  
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the  
lap belt on smaller occupants.  
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out  
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,  
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the  
driver and right front passenger seating positions.  
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for  
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt  
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the  
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety  
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe  
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for  
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle  
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can  
help tighten the safety belts in a side or rear crash.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the  
belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away  
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.  
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce  
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.  
Push down on the  
release button (A) and  
move the height adjuster  
to the desired position.  
The adjuster can be moved  
up by pushing up on the  
shoulder belt guide.  
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners  
activate in a crash, They will need to be replaced,  
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety  
After a Crash on page 1-72.  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added  
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on  
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder  
belt away from the neck and head.  
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,  
try to move it down without pressing the release  
button to make sure it has locked into position.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is one guide for each outboard passenger  
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a  
comfort guide to the safety belt:  
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two  
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.  
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of  
the seatback and the interior body to remove the  
guide from its storage clip.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the  
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  
guide on top.  
{ CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may  
not provide the protection needed in a crash.  
The person wearing the belt could be seriously  
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as  
described previously in this section. Make sure  
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze  
the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be  
removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose  
its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.  
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between  
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop  
of the elastic cord exposed.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,  
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,  
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is  
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.  
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making  
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety Belt Extender  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to  
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,  
you should use it.  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/  
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to  
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the  
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid  
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it  
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been  
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.  
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more  
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with  
the extender.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the  
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for  
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt  
until the child passes the below fit test:  
Child Restraints  
Older Children  
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend  
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to  
the booster seat.  
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt  
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using  
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety  
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on  
page 1-27 for more information. If the shoulder belt  
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the  
booster seat.  
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,  
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return  
to the booster seat.  
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the  
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return  
to the booster seat.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position  
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional  
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
{ CAUTION:  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt  
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can  
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,  
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt  
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should  
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause  
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.  
Never do this.  
Never allow two children to wear the same safety  
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the  
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be  
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety  
belt must be used by only one person at a time.  
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under  
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-27.  
According to accident statistics, children and infants  
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint  
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear  
seating position.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike  
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown  
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety  
belts properly.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the  
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be  
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder  
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be  
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could  
move too far forward increasing the chance of  
head and neck injury. The child might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every  
time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they  
should have the protection provided by appropriate child  
restraints.  
Infants and Young Children  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes  
infants and all other children. Neither the distance  
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,  
the law in every state in the United States and in every  
Canadian province says children up to some age must  
be restrained while in a vehicle.  
Children who are not restrained properly can strike  
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a  
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child  
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it  
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only  
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will  
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a  
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in  
an appropriate restraint.  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave  
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow  
children to play with the safety belts.  
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for  
adults and older children, but not for young children  
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you  
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the  
right front seat, always move the front passenger  
seat as far back as it will go.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Children who are up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured  
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in  
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on child  
restraints?  
{ CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.  
Selection of a particular restraint should take into  
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,  
and age but also whether or not the restraint will  
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it  
will be used.  
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury  
during a crash, infants need complete support.  
This is because an infant’s neck is not fully  
developed and its head weighs so much  
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,  
an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles  
into the restraint, so the crash forces can be  
distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s  
body, the back and shoulders. Infants should  
always be secured in rear-facing child restraints.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there are  
many different models available. When purchasing a  
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a  
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label  
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety  
standards.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that  
come with the restraint state the weight and height  
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,  
there are many kinds of restraints available for  
children with special needs.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
{ CAUTION:  
A rear-facing infant  
seat (A) provides restraint  
with the seating surface  
against the back of  
the infant.  
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that  
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain  
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may  
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,  
the belt would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone  
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce  
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,  
young children should always be secured in  
appropriate child restraints.  
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a  
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.  
A forward-facing child  
seat (B) provides restraint  
for the child’s body  
with the harness.  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in  
the Vehicle  
{ CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the  
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the  
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH  
system, following the instructions that came with  
that child restraint and the instructions in this  
manual.  
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to  
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.  
A booster seat can also help a child to see out  
the window.  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint  
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems  
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the  
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child  
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is  
not properly secured in the vehicle.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the  
instructions that come with the restraint which may be  
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this  
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,  
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement  
copy from the manufacturer.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
According to accident statistics, children and infants  
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint  
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear  
seating position.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no  
child is in it.  
We recommend that children and child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a  
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding  
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in  
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,  
using safety belts.  
Securing the Child Within the Child  
Restraint  
{ CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child is not properly secured in the child  
restraint. Secure the child properly following the  
instructions that came with that child restraint.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk  
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
{ CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to  
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for  
additional information.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with the child  
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure  
the child restraint properly.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no  
child is in it.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Anchors  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving  
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation  
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses  
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child  
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint  
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the  
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following  
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also  
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child  
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the  
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the  
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed  
using only the top tether and anchor.  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.  
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating  
position that will accommodate a child restraint with  
lower attachments (B).  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,  
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.  
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with  
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its  
attachments. The following explains how to attach a  
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have  
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors  
and attachments.  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for  
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others  
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,  
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have  
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to  
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.  
Top Tether Anchor  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one  
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.  
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit  
is available.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with top  
tether anchors.  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint  
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.  
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint  
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order  
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child  
restraint during driving or in a crash.  
j (Lower Anchor): Seating  
positions with two lower  
anchors.  
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a  
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)  
to secure the top tether to the anchor.  
Rear Seat  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To assist you in locating  
the lower anchors, each  
seating position with lower  
anchors has two labels,  
near the crease between  
the seatback and the  
seat cushion.  
To assist you in locating  
the top tether anchors, the  
top tether anchor symbol  
is located on the cover.  
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a  
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that  
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that  
come with the child restraint say that the top tether  
must be attached.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-41 for  
additional information.  
The top tether anchors are located under the covers  
on the rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an  
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the  
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not attach more than one child restraint to  
a single anchor. Attaching more than one child  
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor  
or attachment to come loose or even break during a  
crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce  
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,  
attach only one child restraint per anchor.  
{ CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to  
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect  
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be  
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type  
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use  
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,  
following the instructions that came with the child  
restraint and the instructions in this manual.  
{ CAUTION:  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any  
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so  
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt  
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,  
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint  
has been installed.  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub  
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage  
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety  
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that  
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the  
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.  
Refer to the child restraint instructions and  
the following steps:  
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt  
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or  
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to  
its stowed position, before folding the seat.  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the cover to open  
the cover and expose the anchor.  
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,  
raise the head restraint.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the  
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have  
lower attachments or the desired seating position  
does not have lower anchors, secure the child  
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.  
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer  
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether  
according to your child restraint instructions  
and the following instructions:  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
head restraint and you  
are using a single tether,  
route the tether over  
the seatback.  
instructions and the instructions in this manual.  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on  
the child restraint to the lower anchors.  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether,  
route the tether over  
the seatback.  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed head  
restraint and you are using  
a single tether, route the  
tether over the head  
restraint.  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed head  
restraint and you are  
using a dual tether,  
route the tether around  
the head restraint.  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a  
Rear Seat Position  
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,  
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child  
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions  
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the  
child restraint when and as the instructions say.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with the  
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this  
vehicle.  
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child  
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured  
in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,  
on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations.  
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed  
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the  
Restraint on page 1-41.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be  
anchored.  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
1-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child  
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the  
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and  
more information.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle  
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.  
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,  
disconnect it.  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap  
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back  
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing  
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee  
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten  
the belt.  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to  
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing  
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if  
the right front passenger airbag inflates and the  
passenger seat is in a forward position.  
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to  
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to  
Put the Restraint on page 1-41.  
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system  
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing  
Indicator on page 3-36 for more information, including  
important safety information.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to  
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
{ CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for  
additional information.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child  
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured  
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower  
for top tether anchor locations.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be  
anchored.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that  
came with the child restraint.  
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing the forward-facing child restraint.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator  
on the passenger airbag status indicator should  
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap  
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back  
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing  
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee  
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten  
the belt.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger  
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on  
when the vehicle is started.  
1-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a  
Child Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System  
on page 1-63 for more information.  
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word  
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label  
near the deployment opening.  
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on  
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and  
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle  
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.  
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word  
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest  
to the door.  
Airbag System  
The vehicle has the following airbags:  
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear  
along the headliner or trim.  
A frontal airbag for the driver.  
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags  
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury  
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must  
inflate very quickly to do their job.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front  
passenger.  
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger  
seated directly behind the driver.  
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and  
passenger seated directly behind the right front  
passenger.  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are the most important things to know about the  
airbag system:  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the  
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very  
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to  
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on  
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety  
belts help keep you in position before and during  
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with  
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as  
possible while still maintaining control of the  
vehicle.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash  
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if  
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work  
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,  
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.  
In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint.  
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps  
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the  
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are  
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.  
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety  
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag  
for that person.  
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against  
the door or side windows in seating positions with  
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail  
airbags.  
1-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35  
for more information.  
{ CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured  
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer  
protection for adults and older children, but not for  
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s  
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed  
for them. Young children and infants need the  
protection that a child restraint system can provide.  
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.  
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-33  
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-36.  
Where Are the Airbags?  
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument  
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.  
1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and  
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks  
closest to the door.  
1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
If something is between an occupant and an  
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it  
might force the object into that person causing  
severe injury or even death. The path of an  
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put  
anything between an occupant and an airbag,  
and do not attach or put anything on the steering  
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag  
covering.  
Do not use seat accessories that block the  
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact  
airbag.  
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle  
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down  
through any door or window opening. If you do, the  
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.  
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,  
and second row outboard passengers are in the  
ceiling above the side windows.  
1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle  
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.  
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the  
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right  
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only  
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined  
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used  
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the  
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.  
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.  
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to  
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal  
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish  
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe  
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage  
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.  
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.  
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not  
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends  
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,  
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.  
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail  
airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-55. Seat-mounted  
side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate  
in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these  
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in a severe frontal  
impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags  
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s  
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary  
with specific vehicle design.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.  
For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than  
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).  
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to  
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,  
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to  
inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side  
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the  
vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy  
when either side of the vehicle is struck or in a severe  
frontal impact.  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.  
1-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an  
airbag should have inflated simply because of the  
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs  
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what  
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly  
the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact  
and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the  
location and severity of the side impact.  
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel  
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside  
of the vehicle.  
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety  
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping  
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact  
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an  
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the  
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the  
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,  
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag  
module.  
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,  
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward  
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on  
page 1-60 for more information.  
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more  
than a supplement to safety belts.  
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles  
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag  
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to  
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are  
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the  
side windows that have occupant seating positions.  
1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What Will You See After an Airbag  
Inflates?  
{ CAUTION:  
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact  
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some  
people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail  
airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some  
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag  
module may be hot for several minutes. For location of  
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
on page 1-61.  
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the  
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for  
people with a history of asthma or other breathing  
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle  
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.  
If you have breathing problems but cannot get  
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get  
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you  
experience breathing problems following an airbag  
deployment, you should seek medical attention.  
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you  
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be  
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the  
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the  
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to  
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving  
the vehicle.  
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock  
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard  
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can  
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the  
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for  
those features.  
1-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional  
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front  
passenger airbag.  
Passenger Sensing System  
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the  
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag  
status indicator will be visible on the instrument  
panel when the vehicle is started.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an  
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the  
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag  
system will not be there to help protect you in another  
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and  
possibly other parts. The service manual for your  
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.  
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic  
module which records information after a crash.  
United States  
Canada  
page 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-19.  
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,  
will be visible during the system check. If you are using  
remote start, to start the vehicle from a distance, if  
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the  
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,  
or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-36.  
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag  
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag  
system will not work properly. See your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front  
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.  
The driver airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbags  
and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the  
passenger sensing system.  
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to  
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
{ CAUTION:  
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that  
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors  
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated  
occupant and determine if the right front passenger  
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the  
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be  
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a  
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously  
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag  
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward  
position.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when  
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child  
restraint for their weight and size.  
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,  
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing  
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child  
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,  
who are large enough, using safety belts.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off  
the right front passenger airbag if:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.  
The system determines an infant is present in a  
child restraint.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has  
turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag,  
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.  
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of  
the seat for a period of time.  
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the  
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator  
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn  
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag  
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size  
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the  
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay  
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.  
1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For some children, including children in child restraints,  
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system  
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal  
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture  
and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has  
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt  
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that  
person.  
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child  
Restraint  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit:  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.  
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such  
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,  
or seat massagers.  
{ CAUTION:  
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions  
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and  
Front Seat Position on page 1-52.  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
1-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle  
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and  
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure  
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child  
restraint into the seat cushion.  
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an  
Adult-Size Occupant  
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped  
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,  
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints  
on page 1-2.  
6. Restart the vehicle.  
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn  
off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending  
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is  
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be  
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.  
1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the  
system to detect that person and enable the right front  
passenger frontal airbag:  
Additional Factors Affecting System  
Operation  
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the  
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps  
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger  
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in  
the Index for additional information about the importance  
of proper restraint use.  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such  
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or  
seat massagers.  
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.  
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on  
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.  
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket  
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat  
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect  
how well the passenger sensing system operates.  
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other  
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM  
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to  
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70 for more  
information about modifications that can affect how the  
system operates.  
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in  
this position for two to three minutes after the on  
indicator is lit.  
1-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger  
sensing system. Here is how:  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
The passenger sensing system may turn off the  
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the  
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,  
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument  
panel will also be lit.  
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the airbag system in several places  
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service  
manual have information about servicing the vehicle and  
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see  
Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in  
may make it more likely that the passenger sensing  
system will enable (turn on) the passenger airbag  
while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat.  
If the passenger airbag is turned on, the on indicator  
will be lit.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat  
immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not  
install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat.  
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35 for important  
safety information.  
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off  
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still  
inflate during improper service. You can be injured  
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid  
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the  
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service  
procedures, and make sure the person performing  
work for you is qualified to do so.  
{ CAUTION:  
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or  
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback  
may interfere with the proper operation of the  
passenger sensing system.  
1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also  
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing  
system. This could either prevent proper deployment  
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger  
sensing system from properly turning off the  
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing  
System on page 1-63.  
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change  
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags  
from working properly?  
If you have any questions, call Customer  
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s  
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side  
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from  
working properly. Changing or moving any parts  
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing  
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument  
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner  
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring  
can affect the operation of the airbag system.  
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses  
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of  
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get  
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether  
this will affect my airbag system?  
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.  
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See  
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system for the right front passenger position, which  
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s  
seat. The passenger sensing system may not  
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced  
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with  
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a  
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket  
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,  
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual  
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,  
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.  
1-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airbags  
Restraint System Check  
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled  
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag  
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-35 for more information.  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Safety Belts  
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,  
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.  
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there  
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have  
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.  
For the location of the airbag modules, see  
See your dealer/retailer for service.  
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,  
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and  
anchorages are all working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system  
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.  
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you  
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.  
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.  
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety  
Belts on page 5-113.  
1-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new  
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.  
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any  
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your  
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies  
inspected or replaced.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being  
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH  
system parts.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your  
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not  
properly protect the person using it, resulting in  
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help  
make sure your restraint systems are working  
properly after a crash, have them inspected and  
any necessary replacements made as soon as  
possible.  
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if  
the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped),  
was not being used at the time of the crash.  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier  
in this section.  
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the  
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light  
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are  
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35.  
1-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{ CAUTION:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
other controls or even make the vehicle move.  
The windows will function with the keyless access  
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be  
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a  
closing window. Do not leave the keyless access  
transmitter in a vehicle with children.  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key  
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed. They could  
operate the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows will  
function with the keys in the ignition and children  
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the  
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in  
a vehicle with children.  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless  
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,  
children or others could be badly injured or even  
killed. They could operate the power windows or  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One of the following keys come with the vehicle.  
To remove the key, press  
the button (A) near the  
bottom of the keyless  
access transmitter, and  
pull the key out. Never  
pull the key out without  
pressing the button.  
This key is used for the  
driver door, ignition, and  
glove box.  
This vehicle may have the Keyless Access System.  
for information on starting the vehicle.  
This key, located inside the  
keyless access transmitter,  
is used for the driver door,  
glove box, and rear seat  
pass-through door.  
See “Rear Seat  
Pass-Through Door”  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,  
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.  
Be sure you have spare keys.  
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
under Trunk on page 2-20  
for more information.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System  
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,  
try this:  
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject  
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Rules and with Industry Canada.  
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too  
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy  
or snowy weather.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may  
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the  
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and  
try again.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery  
Replacement” later in this section.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see  
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for  
service.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is  
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors  
unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for  
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions  
work up to 65 feet (20 m) away from the vehicle.  
There are other conditions that can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Remote  
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice  
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71.  
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for  
about one second to unlock the trunk. The automatic  
transmission must be in P (Park) or the manual  
transmission must be in Neutral with the parking  
brake set.  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and  
the horn sounds three times.  
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to  
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash  
and the horn sounds for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off  
when the ignition is moved to START or L is pressed  
again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic  
alarm to work.  
Do not pull on the chrome base of the transmitter.  
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.  
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),  
the parking lamps may flash once to indicate locking has  
occurred. The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again  
within five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on  
page 3-71 for additional information.  
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each  
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.  
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be  
recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”, if enabled  
page 3-71 for more information.  
Programming Transmitters to the  
Vehicle  
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle  
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement  
can be purchased and programmed through your  
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is  
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters  
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters  
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.  
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters  
To replace the battery:  
programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under  
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object  
inserted into the notch, located above the  
metal base.  
Battery Replacement  
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.  
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote  
Key message displays in the DIC. See “Replace Battery  
In Remote Key” under DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-57 for additional information.  
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.  
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.  
4. Snap the transmitter back together.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch  
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static  
from your body could damage the transmitter.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access  
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:  
Keyless Access System  
Your vehicle may have a Keyless Access System  
that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry Canada.  
Check the distance. You may be too far from your  
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during  
rainy or snowy weather.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may  
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the  
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and  
try again.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Check to determine if battery replacement is  
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Check to make sure that an electronic device such  
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not  
causing interference.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer  
or a qualified technician for service.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
With the keyless access transmitter in range, pull the  
rear door handle once to unlock the door and a second  
time to open the door.  
Keyless Access System Operation  
The Keyless Access System transmitter functions  
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.  
To customize which doors unlock when the driver’s door  
handle is pulled, see “Keyless Unlock” under DIC  
Vehicle Customization on page 3-71.  
The Keyless Access System lets you lock and unlock  
the doors and access the trunk without removing the  
remote transmitter from your pocket, purse, briefcase,  
etc. The keyless access transmitter must be within  
3 feet (1 m) of the door or trunk being opened.  
Keyless Locking  
The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are  
closed and at least one keyless access transmitter  
has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.  
To customize whether the doors automatically lock  
when you exit the vehicle, see “Keyless Locking”  
under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-71.  
Keyless Unlocking  
With the keyless access transmitter in range, approach  
the front door to unlock it and pull the handle to open  
the door. All doors will unlock when you approach  
the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter and  
open the driver’s door.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program the vehicle so the turn signal indicators do  
Keyless Trunk Opening  
not flash and the horn does not sound when pressing Q  
on the keyless access transmitter, see “Remote Door  
Lock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization on  
page 3-71.  
Press the trunk release button located on the trunk  
lid above the license plate to open the trunk if the  
keyless access transmitter is within range.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access  
System on page 2-8.  
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.  
The turn signal indicators flash twice.  
Press K twice within five seconds to unlock all the  
doors. The interior lamps may come on.  
To program the vehicle so the turn signal indicators  
do not flash and the fog lamps and reverse lamps remain  
on steady for about 20 seconds when the keyless  
access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle, see  
Remote Door Unlock Feedbackunder DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71.  
For vehicles with the memory feature, press K on the  
keyless access transmitter to program and recall the  
Wheel on page 1-8 for more information.  
With Remote Start  
Shown, Without Similar  
/ (Remote Start): Press to operate the remote start  
feature. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-15 for  
additional information.  
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the doors. The turn signal  
indicators flash. When Q is pressed twice, the turn  
signal indicators flash twice, and the horn sounds once  
to confirm locking.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G (Trunk): Press and hold for about one second  
to unlock the trunk. If the engine is running, the shift  
lever must be in P (Park) for an automatic transmission  
or in Neutral with the parking brake set for a manual  
transmission.  
Programming Transmitters to the  
Vehicle  
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to  
the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen,  
a replacement can be purchased and programmed  
through your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be  
reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters  
no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to four  
transmitters matched to it.  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and  
the turn signal lamps flash three times.  
Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic  
alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash  
for 30 seconds. Press and release L again to stop the  
alarm.  
Programming with a Recognized  
Transmitter  
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle  
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles  
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are  
required to program a new transmitter.  
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each  
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.  
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.  
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will  
be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,  
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors  
Customization on page 3-71 for more information.  
1. The vehicle must be off.  
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be  
with you.  
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder  
located on the outside of the driver door.  
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within  
five seconds.  
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays Ready  
To Learn Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. A beep sounds once the transmitter is programmed.  
The DIC displays Ready To Learn Electronic Key #3  
or 4, or Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned.  
8. Press the ignition control knob to exit  
programming mode.  
9. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket  
and press K on the keyless access transmitter  
two times.  
10. To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 6  
through 9.  
Programming without a Recognized  
Transmitter  
United States owners are permitted to program a new  
transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized transmitter  
is not available. The Canadian immobilizer standard  
requires that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer  
for programming new transmitters when two recognized  
transmitters are not available.  
6. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter  
pocket with the buttons facing the front of the  
vehicle. The transmitter pocket is inside the center  
console storage area located between the driver  
and front passenger seats.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The procedure requires three, ten minute cycles to  
complete the matching process.  
6. Press the ignition switch in.  
7. The DIC reads Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min and  
counts down to zero.  
1. The vehicle must be off.  
8. The DIC displays Press Start Control To Learn  
Keys again.  
9. Press the ignition switch in again.  
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.  
11. The DIC reads Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min and  
counts down to zero.  
12. A beep sounds and the DIC reads Ready To Learn  
Electronic Key # X. All previously known transmitter  
programming has been erased.  
13. A beep sounds once programming is complete.  
The DIC displays Ready To Learn Electronic Key # 2.  
To program additional transmitters, insert each  
transmitter in the pocket until a beep is heard and  
the DIC advances to the next electronic key number.  
Up to four transmitters can be programmed. The  
DIC displays Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned  
and exits the programming mode.  
2. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter  
pocket with the buttons facing the front of the  
vehicle. The transmitter pocket is inside the center  
console storage area located between the driver  
and front passenger seats.  
Press the ignition control knob to complete the  
process.  
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder  
located on the driver door.  
14. Press the ignition control knob if programming is  
complete.  
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within  
five seconds.  
15. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to  
5. The DIC displays Press Start Control To  
Learn Keys.  
complete the process.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the Vehicle with a Low  
Transmitter Battery  
Battery Replacement  
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch  
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static  
from your body could damage the transmitter.  
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote  
Key message displays in the DIC. See “Replace Battery  
In Remote Key” under DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-57 for additional information.  
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display  
Electronic Key Not Detected when you try to start  
the vehicle. To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in  
the center console storage area transmitter pocket  
with the buttons facing to the front of the vehicle. Then,  
with the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the  
brake pedal and the ignition control knob. See Starting  
the Engine on page 2-34, for additional information  
about the vehicle’s electronic keyless ignition with push  
start. Replace the transmitter battery as soon as  
possible.  
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object  
inserted into the slot on the side or back of the  
transmitter.  
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.  
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.  
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.  
4. Snap the transmitter back together.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has  
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is  
still running, to extend the engine running time by  
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.  
Remote Vehicle Start  
This vehicle may have a remote starting feature that  
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.  
It may also start the vehicle’s automatic climate  
control system. When the remote start system is active,  
the climate control system heats and cools the inside of  
the vehicle according to the previous settings of the  
system before turning the vehicle off. The windshield  
defroster and/or rear window defogger turn on if it is cold  
outside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they also turn  
on if the interior or exterior temperature is cold enough.  
See Heated and Ventilated Seats on page 1-7 for  
additional information. Normal operation of the climate  
control system returns after the ignition is turned to  
page 3-24.  
If the vehicle is left running it automatically shuts off after  
10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.  
To manually shut off a remote start:  
Aim the transmitter at the vehicle and press  
the remote start button until the parking lamps  
turn off.  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
Turn the ignition switch on and then off.  
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start, press  
the brake pedal and turn the ignition to ON/RUN to  
drive the vehicle.  
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the  
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of  
remote starters. For example, some laws may require  
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in  
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any  
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.  
transmitter if the vehicle has remote start.  
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:  
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.  
2. Press and release the transmitter’s Q , then  
Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle is low  
on fuel. The vehicle may run out of fuel.  
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s / for  
at least four seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signal  
lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.  
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on  
and remain on while the vehicle is running.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate  
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it  
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running  
that may be extended 10 more minutes. If the transmitter  
lock button is pressed and released and then the remote  
start button is pressed and held again before the first  
10 minutes of engine running time has expired,  
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.  
For example, if the lock button and then the remote  
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of  
the engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you  
now have 15 minutes of engine running. The added  
ten minutes are considered a second remote  
vehicle start.  
The remote start feature does not operate if any of the  
following occur:  
The ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF.  
A keyless access transmitter is inside the vehicle.  
The hood is open.  
There is an emission control system malfunction.  
The engine turns off during a remote vehicle start if the  
coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure  
is too low.  
If this vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE  
transmitter functions have an increased range of  
operation. However, the range may be less while  
the vehicle is running.  
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time  
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started  
normally before the remote start feature can be used  
again.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless  
System on page 2-8 for additional information.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-51 for important safety  
information when using remote start in a closed garage.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.  
Doors and Locks  
From the inside, use the manual lock levers located  
on the door panels near the windows.  
Door Locks  
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.  
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.  
If the windows are down and the doors are locked, do  
not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because you  
will set off the alarm.  
{ CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
From the outside, use the key, or press the lock or  
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
Operation on page 2-6 for more information.  
Passengers, especially children, can easily  
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.  
When a door is locked, the handle will not open  
it. The chance of being thrown out of the  
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are  
not locked. So, all passengers should wear  
safety belts properly and the doors should be  
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.  
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles  
may be unable to get out. A child can be  
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer  
permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever  
leaving it.  
On vehicles with the Remote Keyless Access system,  
the door unlocks by pulling the door handle when  
you have the transmitter with you. See Keyless Access  
System Operation on page 2-9 for more information.  
Central Door Unlocking System  
The vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.  
When unlocking the driver door, the other doors can  
be unlocked by holding the key in the turned position  
for a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice  
in the lock cylinder.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked  
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.  
Locking your doors can help prevent this from  
happening.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Door Locks  
Programmable Automatic Door  
Locks  
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are  
located on the front doors.  
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the vehicle  
is programmed so that the doors will lock automatically  
when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the  
shift lever is moved out of P (Park). The doors will  
automatically unlock when the vehicle is stopped  
and the shift lever is moved into P (Park).  
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.  
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press  
to lock the doors.  
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, the vehicle is  
programmed so that the doors will lock automatically  
after the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km). The doors  
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned  
off and the key is removed from the ignition.  
Delayed Locking  
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of the  
doors.  
When the power door lock switch is pressed when the  
key is not in the ignition and the driver door is opened,  
a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed  
locking is active.  
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors  
are locked, have that person use the manual lever  
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed  
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual  
lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.  
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock  
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened  
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer  
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.  
The power door locks can be programmed through  
prompts displayed on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). For more information on programming,  
see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-71.  
You can press the door lock switch again or the lock  
button on the RKE transmitter to override this feature  
and lock the doors immediately.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you want to open a rear door when the security  
lock is on:  
Rear Door Security Locks  
The vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent  
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.  
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) or Keyless Access System transmitter,  
if the vehicle has one, the power door lock  
switch, or the rear door manual lock.  
The rear door security  
locks are located on the  
inside edge of each rear  
door. The rear doors must  
be open to access them.  
The label showing lock  
and unlock positions  
2. Open the door from the outside.  
To cancel the rear door security lock:  
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.  
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it  
so the slot is in the vertical position.  
is located near the lock.  
Lockout Protection  
If the power door lock switch is pressed when the key  
is in the ignition and a door is open, all the doors will lock  
and only the driver door will unlock. If the doors are  
closed, they can be locked by using the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter. Be sure to remove the key from  
the ignition when locking the vehicle.  
Lock Label shown  
To set the locks:  
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock  
button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the power  
lock switch a second time.  
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it  
so the slot is in the horizontal position.  
On vehicles with a Keyless Access System, the system  
can be programmed to alert you when all the doors  
are closed and a transmitter has been left inside of the  
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-71  
for more information.  
2. Close the door.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trunk Lock Release  
Trunk  
The remote trunk release  
button is located on the  
lower portion of the  
driver door.  
{ CAUTION:  
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven  
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any  
objects that pass through the seal between the  
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust  
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be  
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and  
even death.  
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or  
trunk/hatch open:  
Close all of the windows.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
To use the remote trunk release, the shift lever must be  
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission. The shift lever must be in N (Neutral),  
with the parking brake set for a vehicle with a manual  
transmission.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that brings in only outside air and set the fan  
speed to the highest setting. See Climate  
Control System in the Index.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,  
disable the power liftgate function.  
For more information about carbon monoxide, see  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-51.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also  
press the button with the trunk symbol on the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the trunk.  
On vehicles with a rear seat pass-through door:  
1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the  
pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”  
following for more information.  
With the Keyless Access System, when you have the  
transmitter, the trunk can be opened by the trunk release  
button located on the rear of the trunk above the license  
plate. The vehicle must be in P (Park) and the valet mode  
turned off.  
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the  
emergency trunk release handle. See “Emergency  
Trunk Release Handle” for more information.  
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open  
the trunk lid.  
If the vehicle is locked, the keyless access transmitter  
must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk opening for it  
to be recognized and allow the trunk to open.  
On vehicles with a split folding rear seat:  
If the vehicle is ever without power, the trunk area  
can still be accessed by using one of the following  
procedures.  
1. Fold down the rear seatback. See Split Folding  
Rear Seat on page 1-13 for more information.  
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the  
trunk release handle.  
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open  
the trunk lid.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
Close the trunk by pulling on the handle. Do not use the  
handle as a tie-down.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release  
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.  
The emergency trunk release handle is only intended  
to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling  
them to open the trunk from the inside.  
Rear-Seat Pass Through  
If the vehicle has the rear seat-pass through door,  
the trunk can be accessed through the rear seat.  
This is useful when transporting long items.  
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.  
Then pull the lever all the way down to release the door.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release  
handle located on the back wall of the trunk. This handle  
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release  
handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk  
from the inside.  
To close the door, push it up and back into place.  
Then try to open the door without pulling up on the lever  
to make sure it is locked into place.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a  
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.  
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and  
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a  
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows  
closed in warm or hot weather.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The power window  
switches are located on  
the driver door.  
Power Windows  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous for many reasons, children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed. They could  
operate the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows will  
function and they could be seriously injured or  
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.  
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.  
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.  
The front power window switch operates with two  
positions for both up and down movement and the rear  
power window switch operates with one position for up  
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch  
to the first position to lower the window to the desired  
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.  
When there are children in the rear seat use the  
window lockout button to prevent unintentional  
operation of the windows.  
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
that allows you to use the power windows once  
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Down/Up Windows  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override  
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to  
be raised and lowered all the way without holding  
the switch.  
{ CAUTION:  
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate  
the express feature.  
If express override is activated, the window will  
not reverse automatically. You or others could be  
injured and the window could be damaged. Before  
you use express override, make sure that all people  
and obstructions are clear of the window path.  
The express mode can be canceled at any time by  
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature  
If any object is in the path of the window when  
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the  
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.  
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause  
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to  
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is  
removed.  
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be  
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window  
switch all the way up to the second position. The window  
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the  
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.  
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in  
its path. Use care when using the override mode.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Power Windows  
Window Lockout  
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,  
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to  
reprogram each front power window for the express-up  
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or  
recharge the vehicle’s battery.  
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button  
is located on the driver door near the window switches.  
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear  
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,  
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows  
still can be raised or lowered using the driver window  
switches when the lockout feature is active.  
To program each front window, follow these steps:  
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,  
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is  
active, close all doors.  
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button  
again. The light on the button will go out.  
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the  
window is fully open.  
Sun Visors  
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is  
fully closed.  
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be  
detached from the center mount and moved to the  
side to block glare from that direction.  
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately  
two seconds after the window is completely closed.  
The driver visor may also have buttons for a built-in  
garage door opener. See Universal Home Remote  
System on page 2-61 for more information.  
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process  
for the other windows.  
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror  
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the  
mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted and  
goes out when it is closed.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a locked door or trunk is opened without using the  
key in the driver’s door key cylinder or the transmitter, a  
ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and  
the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the ignition  
and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by  
pressing the unlock button on the transmitter during the  
ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s  
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about  
30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power.  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,  
they do not make it impossible to steal.  
Theft-Deterrent System  
If your vehicle has this  
feature, the security light is  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors  
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door  
lock. It activates only if the power door lock switch  
is used while the door is open or with the transmitter.  
You should also remember that you can start your  
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has  
been set off.  
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:  
To activate the theft-deterrent system:  
1. Open the door.  
Lock the vehicle with the door key after the doors  
are closed.  
2. Lock the door with the transmitter. The security light  
should come on and stay on.  
Always unlock a door with the transmitter. Unlocking  
a door any other way will set off the alarm.  
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off  
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed  
until the security light goes off.  
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by  
pressing the unlock button on the transmitter. The alarm  
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Testing the Alarm  
Immobilizer  
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window  
and open the driver’s door.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the  
transmitter.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for  
the security light to go out.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door  
with the manual door lock and open the door.  
This should set off the alarm.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will  
not work.  
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the  
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.  
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,  
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-120  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do  
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to  
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement  
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.  
The following procedure is for programming additional  
keys only.  
Immobilizer Operation (Key Access)  
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.  
The system is automatically armed when the key  
is removed from the ignition.  
To program a new key do the following:  
The theft-deterrent system is disarmed when the key is  
turned to ON/RUN.  
1. Verify that the new key has 1 stamped on it.  
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.  
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and  
start the engine. If the engine will not start see  
your dealer/retailer for service.  
The security light will come on if there is a problem  
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to  
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.  
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer  
control unit in your vehicle and automatically disarms  
the system. Only the correct key will start the vehicle.  
If the key is ever damaged, you may not be able to  
start your vehicle.  
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to  
ON/RUN within five seconds of the ignition being  
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.  
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not  
start and the security light comes on, there may be a  
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the  
ignition off and try again.  
5. The security light will turn off once the key has  
been programmed. It may not be apparent that  
the security light went on due to how quickly the  
key is programmed.  
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are  
to be programmed.  
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to  
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,  
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses  
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-120. If the engine still  
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs  
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be  
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the  
theft-deterrent system and have a new key made.  
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or  
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the ignition control knob does not rotate, and the  
keyless access transmitter appears to be undamaged,  
try another keyless access transmitter. Or, you may  
try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket  
located in the center console. See “Electronic Key  
Not Detected” under DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-57. At this time, you may also want to check the  
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-120.  
If the ignition control knob still does not rotate with the  
other transmitter, your vehicle needs service. If the  
ignition control knob does rotate, the first transmitter  
may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service  
the theft-deterrent system and have a new keyless  
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle.  
Immobilizer Operation  
(Keyless Access)  
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.  
The system is automatically armed when the ignition  
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.  
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition  
control knob is pushed in and a valid transmitter is  
found in the vehicle.  
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.  
The security light will come on if there is a problem  
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.  
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or  
replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to 4 keyless  
access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.  
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching  
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access  
System Operation on page 2-9.  
The system has one or more keyless access  
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control  
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless  
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless  
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not  
be able to start your vehicle.  
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or  
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.  
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not  
start and the security light comes on, there may be  
a problem with your immobilizer system. Turn the  
ignition control knob off and try again.  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake  
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new  
linings can mean premature wear and earlier  
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every  
time you get new brake linings.  
Starting and Operating Your  
Vehicle  
New Vehicle Break-In  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a  
Trailer (CTS-V) on page 4-29 for the trailer towing  
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.  
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate  
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if  
you follow these guidelines:  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be  
gradually increased.  
Keep your speed at 70 mph (113 km/h) or less for  
the first 1,500 miles (2 414km).  
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or  
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not  
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake  
or slow the vehicle.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the  
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks the  
ignition and shifter on automatic transmission vehicles,  
and the ignition and steering wheel on manual  
transmission vehicles.  
Ignition Positions (Key Access)  
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use  
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when  
the engine is off. This position allows you to turn off the  
engine.  
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the  
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine  
starts, and the key is released.  
To shift the transmission out of P (Park), the ignition key  
has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.  
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the  
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine  
off. The vehicle might not start if the battery is allowed  
to drain for an extended period of time.  
The key can be turned to four different positions.  
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in the  
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal  
must be applied.  
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the  
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch  
returns to ON/RUN for driving.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from its  
cylinder could cause damage or break the key.  
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your  
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is  
and you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn  
the steering wheel left and right while you turn  
the key hard. If none of this works, then the vehicle  
needs service.  
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is  
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or  
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A (LOCK/OFF): The ignition control knob cannot  
be removed from the vehicle. The keyless access  
transmitter must be inside the vehicle to start the engine.  
This position locks the ignition and shifter on automatic  
transmission vehicles, and the ignition and steering wheel  
on manual transmission vehicles.  
Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)  
You can turn the ignition control knob to four different  
positions.  
To shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the ON/RUN  
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must  
be applied.  
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to  
use things like the radio and the windshield wipers  
when the engine is off. This position will allow you  
to turn off the engine.  
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the  
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine  
starts, and the control knob is released.  
If you need to shift the transmission out of P (Park), the  
ignition control knob has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY  
or ON/RUN.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in  
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the  
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the  
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.  
Using a tool to force the ignition control knob from its  
cylinder could damage it.  
Make sure the keyless access transmitter is inside the  
vehicle when trying to turn the ignition control knob.  
D (START): This position starts the engine.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, put your  
foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition control  
knob to the START position. When the engine begins  
cranking, let go of the ignition control knob, it will return  
to the ON/RUN position.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to  
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:  
Audio System  
Power Windows  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or  
until the driver door is opened. Power to the windows or  
sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until any door  
is opened. For an additional 10 minutes of operation,  
close all the doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and  
then back to LOCK/OFF.  
If the transmitter is not in the vehicle or something is  
interfering with the transmitter, the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) will display Electronic Key Not Detected.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for  
more information.  
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter  
needs replacing, the DIC displays Replace Battery In  
Remote Key. The vehicle can still be driven. See “Battery  
on page 2-9 for more information.  
Starting the Engine  
Place the transmission in the proper gear.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, the keyless  
access transmitter must be authenticated in order for the  
ignition control knob to turn. The transmitter can be  
authenticated either by putting your foot on the brake  
pedal or by pushing the ignition control knob in.  
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the  
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage  
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the  
vehicle is stopped.  
Manual Transmission  
The shift lever should be in neutral position and the  
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to  
the floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start  
if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.  
Automatic Transmission  
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).  
The engine will not start in any other position.  
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already  
moving, use N (Neutral) only.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or 18°C),  
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.  
Starting Procedure  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition key to START. If the vehicle has the keyless  
access system, push the ignition control knob in and  
turn the knob to the START position. When the  
engine starts, let go of the ignition. The idle speed  
will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race  
the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the  
engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to  
warm up and lubricate all moving parts.  
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to  
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key  
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.  
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow  
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle  
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.  
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.  
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.  
Operate the engine and transmission gently until  
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.  
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking  
System. This feature assists in starting the engine  
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned  
to the START position, and then released when the  
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue  
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.  
If the engine does not start and the key is held in  
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped  
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.  
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents  
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine  
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition  
switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.  
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts  
or accessories, you could change the way the  
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,  
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the  
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting  
damage would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of  
time, by returning the key to the START position  
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat  
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the  
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,  
to let the cranking motor cool down.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
{ CAUTION:  
Vehicles with the engine coolant heater can use this  
option in cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (18°C)  
for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine  
warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours  
before starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in  
the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent  
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above  
0°F (18°C).  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could  
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of  
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.  
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a  
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.  
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty  
three-prong extension cord rated for at least  
15 amps.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.  
The cord is located near the driver side strut tower.  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could  
be damaged.  
Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.  
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
Contact your dealer/retailer for information on how long  
to use the heater in your particular area.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Operation  
{ CAUTION:  
The shift lever is located on the center console between  
the front seats.  
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift  
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake  
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.  
There are several different  
positions for the shift lever.  
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure the  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly  
level ground, always set the parking brake and  
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into  
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer  
on page 4-29.  
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the  
best position to use when you start the engine because  
the vehicle cannot move easily.  
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before  
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic  
transmission shift lock control system. You must  
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press  
the shift lever button before you can shift from  
P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on  
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into  
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press  
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another  
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-49.  
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle is  
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. You can also  
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.  
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is  
moving forward could damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle  
is stopped.  
{ CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your  
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could  
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit  
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear  
while the engine is running at high speed.  
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.  
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock  
the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or  
sand without damaging your transmission. See If Your  
page 4-20 for additional information.  
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with  
the engine running at high speed may damage the  
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by  
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not  
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides  
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for  
passing, and you are:  
Driver Shift Control (DSC)  
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs  
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control  
(DSC), you could damage the vehicle. Always upshift  
when necessary while using DSC.  
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and  
have more power.  
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows you to shift an  
automatic transmission similar to a manual transmission.  
To use the DSC feature:  
1. Move the shift lever to the right from D (Drive) to  
M (Manual Mode).  
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions  
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of  
Control on page 4-12  
Once in M (Manual Mode), if you do not move the  
shift lever forward or rearward, the vehicle will be  
in sport mode. When you are in sport mode the  
vehicle will still shift automatically. The transmission  
may remain in a gear longer than it would in the  
normal driving mode based on braking, throttle  
input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.  
While in D (Drive), the CTS-V vehicle’s first forward  
gear automatic shift after starting the vehicle will be from  
1 (First). Afterwards, the CTS-V vehicles will always  
start in 2 (Second) gear. While in M (Manual Mode),  
for increased performance, the vehicle will start in  
1 (First) gear.  
SPORT MODE will be displayed in the DIC  
momentarily. The vehicle will remain in sport  
mode if the shift lever is not moved. Sport mode  
will shift automatically but remain in a gear longer  
then it would in normal driving mode based on  
braking and acceleration.  
M (Manual Mode): This position allows the driver to  
select the range of gears appropriate for current driving  
conditions. If the vehicle has this feature, see Driver  
Shift Control (DSC) later in this section.  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in  
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal  
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do  
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the  
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.  
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward  
to downshift.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have  
firmer, quicker shifting. You can use this for sport driving  
or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear  
longer, or to down shift for more power or engine  
braking.  
The transmission will only allow you to shift into  
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine  
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will  
not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the engine  
RPM is too high, nor to the next higher gear when the  
maximum engine RPM is reached.  
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently  
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that  
the transmission has not shifted gears.  
The tachometer display on the instrument panel  
cluster will show which gear the vehicle is in.  
The number indicates the requested gear range  
when moving the shift lever forward or rearward.  
See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3-33  
for more information on the odometer.  
While in the DSC mode, the CTS automatic transmission  
will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes  
to a stop. This will allow for more power during take-off.  
The CTS-V automatic transmission will not automatically  
downshift on hard acceleration when in DSC mode.  
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside of  
the tachometer as a performance up-shift light. These  
tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the next higher  
gear to avoid the engine speed limit. See Tachometer  
on page 3-33 for more information.  
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy  
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second  
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction  
on slippery surfaces.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside  
of the tachometer as a performance up-shift light.  
These tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the  
next higher gear to avoid the engine speed limit.  
See Tachometer on page 3-33 for more information.  
Tap Shift  
While using the Tap Shift feature, the vehicle will have  
firmer, quicker shifting for increased performance.  
You can use this for sport driving or when climbing or  
descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift  
for more power or engine braking.  
The transmission will only allow you to shift into  
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine  
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will  
not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the  
engine RPM is too high, nor to the next higher gear  
when the maximum engine RPM is reached.  
To use Tap Shift, the shift lever must be in Manual  
Mode. Vehicles with this feature have switches on  
the back of the steering wheel. Tap the left switch to  
downshift, and the right switch to upshift.  
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently  
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that  
the transmission has not shifted gears.  
The tachometer display on the instrument panel cluster  
will show which gear the vehicle is in and a number  
indicating the requested gear range when moving  
the shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer  
and Odometer on page 3-33 for more information on  
the odometer.  
While in the Tap Shift mode, the transmission will not  
automatically downshift on hard acceleration.  
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy  
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second  
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction  
on slippery surfaces.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the  
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly  
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator  
pedal.  
Manual Transmission Operation  
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift lever  
is located on the center console between the front seats.  
The following explains how to operate the manual  
transmission.  
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth): Shift into  
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the same  
way you do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch  
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.  
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the  
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the  
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.  
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your  
engine. Your shift lever is in Neutral when it is centered  
in the shift pattern, not in any gear.  
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal,  
completely stop the vehicle, and shift into R (Reverse).  
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
CTS  
CTS-V  
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).  
Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press  
the accelerator pedal.  
The CTS-V transmission prevents you from easily  
shifting into R (Reverse) using normal shifting force  
while the vehicle is moving at more than 3 mph (5 km/h),  
or when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF.  
Shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than  
25 mph (40 km/h). For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when  
you are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come  
to a complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put  
the shift lever in Neutral and let up on the clutch. Press  
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First).  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Up-Shift Light  
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)  
CTS vehicles with a  
manual transmission have  
an economy up-shift light  
on the instrument panel.  
This light shows when to  
shift to the next higher gear  
for the best fuel economy.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could  
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourself  
or others. Do not shift down more than one gear at  
a time when you downshift.  
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next  
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.  
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and  
shift when the light comes on.  
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when  
you downshift, or if you race the engine when you  
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you  
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the  
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the engine  
when downshifting.  
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go  
on and off if you quickly change the position of the  
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.  
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside of  
the tachometer as a performance up-shift light. These  
tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the next higher  
gear to avoid the engine speed limit. See Tachometer on  
page 3-33 for more information.  
If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h),  
or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should  
downshift to the next lower gear. You may have  
to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine  
running smoothly or for good performance.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Skip Shift (CTS-V)  
Under light acceleration, the transmission will only allow  
you to shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). Shifts from  
1 (First) to 2 (Second) or 3 (Third) are not allowed.  
This helps improve fuel mileage.  
Under harder acceleration, Skip Shift is disabled, and  
the driver has all gears available.  
Parking Brake  
The parking brake pedal is  
located on the lower portion  
of the instrument panel to  
the left of the steering  
wheel.  
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever  
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument  
panel.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure  
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake  
warning light is off before driving.  
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,  
then push the parking brake pedal down.  
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,  
the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move.  
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.  
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on  
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does  
not, you need to have the vehicle serviced. See Brake  
System Warning Light on page 3-38 for more information.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see  
a Trailer (CTS) on page 4-29 for more information.  
Vehicles with  
the Electric  
Parking Brake  
(EPB) have  
a switch in the  
center console.  
Electric Parking Brake  
{ CAUTION:  
On vehicles with a manual transmission, releasing  
the clutch and pressing the accelerator will release  
the Electric Parking Brake. If the vehicle is not in a  
gear, the vehicle could move, and you or others  
could be injured. Make sure the vehicle is in a  
gear before attempting to drive away. To avoid  
unexpected vehicle movement, do not partially  
release the clutch or press the accelerator pedal  
until you are ready to release the parking brake  
and drive away.  
The EPB takes the place of the manual parking brake  
system, the foot pedal and release handle. The system  
has two warning lights and five Driver Information  
Center (DIC) messages. See Brake System Warning  
on page 3-57 for more information. In case of insufficient  
electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If this light is flashing, the EPB is only partially applied  
or released, or there is a problem with the EPB. The DIC  
message “Service Park Brake” will be displayed. If this  
light is flashing, release the EPB, and attempt to apply it  
again. If this light continues to flash, do not drive the  
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.  
EPB Apply  
The EPB can be applied any time the vehicle is stopped.  
The EPB is applied by momentarily lifting up on the  
EPB switch. Once fully applied, the BRAKE light will be  
on, and the DIC message “Park Brake Set” will be  
displayed. If the light does not come on, or is flashing,  
you need to have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive  
the vehicle if the BRAKE light is flashing. See your  
dealer/retailer. See Brake System Warning Light  
on page 3-38 for more information.  
If the Y light is on, the EPB has detected an error  
in another system and is operating with reduced  
functionality. To apply the EPB when this light is on,  
lift up on the EPB switch and hold it in the up position.  
Full application of the parking brake by the EPB system  
may take a longer period of time than normal when  
this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the  
If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is in motion, a  
chime will sound, and the DIC message “Release Park  
Brake Switch” will be displayed. The vehicle will  
decelerate as long as the switch is held in the up position.  
Releasing the EPB switch during the deceleration will  
release the parking brake. If the switch is held in the up  
position until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will  
remain applied.  
BRAKE light remains on. If the Y light is on, see  
your dealer/retailer.  
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear wheels should be  
blocked to prevent vehicle movement.  
If the BRAKE light is on, either the EPB is applied,  
or there is a failure in the hydraulic brake system.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPB Release  
Automatic EPB Release  
To release the EPB, turn the ignition switch to the  
ON/RUN position, apply and hold the brake pedal,  
and push down momentarily on the EPB switch.  
If you attempt to release the EPB without the brake  
pedal applied, a chime will sound, and the DIC message  
“Press Brake Pedal to Release Park Brake” will be  
displayed. The EPB is released when the BRAKE light  
is off and the DIC message “Park Brake Released” is  
displayed.  
The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is  
running, placed into gear and an attempt is made to  
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB  
is applied, to preserve park brake lining life.  
The EPB can also be used to prevent roll back for  
vehicles with a manual transmission taking off on a hill.  
In a situation where no roll back is desired, an applied  
EPB will allow both feet to be used for the clutch and  
accelerator pedals in preparation for starting the vehicle  
moving in the intended direction.  
If the Y light is on, the EPB has detected an error  
in another system and is operating with reduced  
functionality. To release the EPB when this light is on,  
push down on the EPB switch and hold it in the down  
position. EPB release may take a longer period of time  
than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the  
In this situation, perform the normal clutch and  
accelerator actions required to begin moving the  
vehicle. There is no need to push the switch to  
release the EPB.  
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see  
a Trailer (CTS) on page 4-29 for more information.  
switch until the BRAKE light is off. If the Y light is on,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure  
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake  
warning light is off before driving.  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use this procedure to shift into P (Park):  
Shifting Into Park  
(Automatic Transmission)  
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking  
brake.  
See Parking Brake on page 2-44 for more  
information.  
{ CAUTION:  
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the  
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all  
the way toward the front of the vehicle.  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking  
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have  
left the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be  
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are  
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.  
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer  
on page 4-29.  
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.  
4. For vehicles with key access, remove the key and  
take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with  
the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in  
P (Park). Vehicles with the keyless access system,  
take the keyless access transmitter with you.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine  
Running (Automatic Transmission)  
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)  
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts  
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.  
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the  
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then  
it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque  
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park).  
To find out how, see ‘‘Shifting Into P (Park)’’ listed  
previously.  
{ CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the  
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if  
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking  
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with  
the engine running, it could overheat and even  
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not  
leave the vehicle with the engine running.  
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be  
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking  
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).  
Shifting Out of Park  
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock  
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:  
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,  
the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake  
set. After shifting into P (Park), try to move the shift lever  
out without first pushing the button on the shift lever.  
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift  
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully  
released, for vehicles with key access.  
If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into  
P (Park).  
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of  
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or  
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal is applied.  
The shift lock release is always functional except in the  
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)  
battery.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with  
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.  
See Jump Starting on page 5-48 for more information.  
Parking the Vehicle  
(Manual Transmission)  
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:  
1. Apply the brake pedal.  
Before you get out of the vehicle, place the shift lever in  
R (Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.  
For vehicles with the key access ignition, turn the  
ignition key to OFF/LOCK, press the release button  
and remove the key. See “Key Release Button” under  
Positions (Keyless Access) on page 2-33 for more  
information.  
2. Then press the shift lever button.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.  
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):  
1. Fully release the shift lever button.  
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift  
lever button again.  
For vehicles with the keyless access ignition, turn  
the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless  
access transmitter.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),  
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service.  
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (CTS-V)  
on page 4-29 or Towing a Trailer (CTS) on page 4-29.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parking Over Things That Burn  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{ CAUTION:  
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:  
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation  
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that  
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).  
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or  
different.  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park  
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things  
that can burn.  
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or  
damage.  
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been  
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.  
There are holes or openings in the  
vehicle body from damage or after-market  
modifications that are not completely sealed.  
Engine Exhaust  
{ CAUTION:  
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected  
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:  
Drive it only with the windows  
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO  
can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
completely down.  
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in  
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building  
that has no fresh air ventilation.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Vehicle While Parked  
{ CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if  
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully  
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.  
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle  
when the engine is running unless you have to.  
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can  
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when  
it is on fairly level ground, always set the parking  
brake and move the automatic transmission shift  
lever to P (Park), or the manual transmission shift  
lever to Neutral.  
{ CAUTION:  
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor  
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may  
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon  
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.  
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that  
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,  
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-51.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not  
Transmission) on page 2-50.  
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (CTS-V) on  
page 4-29 or Towing a Trailer (CTS) on page 4-29.  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outside Power Mirrors  
Mirrors  
Controls for the outside  
power mirrors are located  
on the driver door.  
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror  
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview  
mirror with OnStar® controls, located at the bottom of the  
mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information on  
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar®  
System on page 2-57 for more information about the  
services OnStar provides.  
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.  
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation  
To adjust each mirrors:  
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps  
from behind you. The dimming feature comes on and the  
indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started.  
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver’s or passenger  
side mirror.  
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control  
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.  
Use a soft towel dampened with water.  
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the  
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.  
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.  
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage  
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push  
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,  
to return to its original position.  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Park Tilt Mirrors  
Outside Heated Mirrors  
If the vehicle has this feature, the passenger and/or  
driver outside mirror tilts to a preselected position when  
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the driver  
to view the curb when parallel parking.  
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the  
mirrors.  
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate  
Control System on page 3-24 for more information.  
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and after  
a five-second delay, the mirrors return to their original  
position.  
Object Detection Systems  
Outside Convex Mirror  
Ultrasonic Rear Parking  
Assist (URPA)  
{ CAUTION:  
For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at  
speeds less than 5mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver  
with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).  
The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect  
the distance to an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind  
the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off  
the ground.  
A convex mirror can make things (like other  
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.  
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could  
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex  
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from  
the driver seat.  
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The display is located  
above the rear window and  
can be seen by looking  
over your right shoulder.  
{ CAUTION:  
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)  
system does not replace driver vision.  
It cannot detect:  
objects that are below the bumper,  
underneath the vehicle, or if they are  
too close or far from the vehicle  
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.  
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance  
and system information.  
If you do not use proper care before and while  
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could  
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the  
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure  
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following describes what will occur with the URPA  
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:  
How the System Works  
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is  
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly  
illuminates to indicate the system is working.  
Description  
amber light  
English  
8 ft  
Metric  
2.5 m  
1.0 m  
0.6 m  
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph  
(8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the  
red light on the rear display will flash.  
amber/amber lights  
amber/amber/red lights  
40 in  
23 in  
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches  
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects  
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.  
This distance may be less during warmer or humid  
weather.  
amber/amber/red lights  
flashing and beep for  
five seconds  
1 ft  
0.3 m  
The system can be disabled through the Driver  
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under  
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50 for more  
information.  
A single beep will sound the first time an object is  
detected between 23 inches (0.6 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)  
away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the  
vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.  
2-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® System  
When the System Does Not Seem to  
Work Properly  
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary  
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be  
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on  
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into  
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:  
The driver disables the system.  
The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the  
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,  
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see  
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-113.  
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live  
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,  
information, and convenience services. If the airbags  
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic  
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request  
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys  
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good  
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar  
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,  
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button  
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.  
A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or  
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the last  
drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the rear  
display. Once the attached object is removed, URPA  
will return to normal operation.  
A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.  
The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle  
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.  
Other conditions may affect system performance,  
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the  
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.  
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms  
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber  
glove box literature.  
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at  
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer.  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen  
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available  
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.  
After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select  
a monthly or annual subscription payment plan.  
If a payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system  
and all services, including airbag notification and  
emergency services, may be deactivated and no  
longer available. For more information visit onstar.com  
(U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), or press the OnStar  
button to speak with an advisor.  
OnStar Services Available with the  
Safe & Sound Plan  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email  
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes  
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)  
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.  
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services  
described below, or for a full description of OnStar  
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s  
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or  
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the  
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours  
a day, 7 days a week.  
OnStar Services Included with  
Directions & Connections Plan  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
2-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling  
OnStar Virtual Advisor  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar  
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice  
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into  
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid  
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes  
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be  
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.  
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending  
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar  
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit  
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar  
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling  
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).  
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access  
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock  
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple  
voice commands to browse through the various topics.  
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.  
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.  
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls  
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can  
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.  
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-122  
for more information.  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to  
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone  
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.  
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor  
locate a business or address and download driving  
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the  
desired destination will play through the audio system  
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location information about the vehicle is only available  
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and  
available.  
How OnStar Service Works  
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle  
information. This information is automatically sent to an  
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,  
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or  
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes  
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,  
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle  
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle  
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends  
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide  
services where it is located.  
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,  
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar  
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar  
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing  
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some  
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle  
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or  
wireless phone network congestion.  
Your Responsibility  
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor  
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons  
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.  
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle  
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is  
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and  
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar  
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.  
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a  
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless  
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service  
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where  
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that  
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when  
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible  
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available  
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,  
or at all times.  
2-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Universal Home Remote System  
Operation (With One Triangular LED)  
Universal Home Remote  
System  
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to  
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)  
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage  
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)  
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote  
buttons, follow the instructions below.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This system provides a way to replace up to three  
remote control transmitters used to activate devices  
such as garage door openers, security systems,  
and home automation devices.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any  
garage door opener that does not have the stop and  
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener  
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Read the instructions completely before attempting to  
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of  
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another  
person available to assist you in the programming  
the Universal Home Remote.  
2-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other  
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote  
programming. It is also recommended that upon the  
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home  
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.  
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later  
in this section.  
To program up to three devices:  
When programming a garage door, park outside of the  
garage. Park directly in line with and facing the garage  
door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be sure that  
people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate  
that is being programmed.  
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the  
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing  
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator  
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step  
will erase the factory settings or all previously  
programmed buttons.  
It is recommended that a new battery be installed  
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more  
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.  
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than  
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program  
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.  
Programming the Universal Home  
Remote System  
For questions or help programming the Universal  
Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go  
to www.homelink.com.  
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about  
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal  
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator  
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied  
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener  
receiver (motor head unit).  
Programming a garage door opener involves  
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure  
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out  
and the procedure will have to be repeated.  
2-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal  
Home Remote button to be used to control the  
garage door and the hand-held transmitter button.  
Do not release the Universal Home Remote button  
or the hand-held transmitter button until Step 4 has  
been completed.  
Some entry gates and garage door openers  
may require substitution of Step 3 with the  
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and  
Canadian Programming” later in this section.  
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote  
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after  
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the  
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.  
Release both buttons.  
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,  
locate inside the garage the garage door opener  
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”  
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the  
button may vary by manufacturer.  
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home  
Remote button and observe the indicator light.  
If the indicator light stays on continuously,  
the programming is complete and the garage door  
should move when the Universal Home Remote  
button is pressed and released. There is no need  
to continue programming Steps 6 through 8.  
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light  
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to  
a constant light, continue with the programming  
Steps 6 through 8.  
It may be helpful to have another person assist with  
the remaining steps.  
2-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”  
button. After you press this button, you will have  
30 seconds to complete Step 8.  
Gate Operator and Canadian  
Programming  
If you have questions or need help programming the  
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515  
or go to www.homelink.com.  
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and  
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in  
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,  
and then release it. If the garage door does not  
move, press and hold the same button a second  
time for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if  
the door does not move, press and hold the same  
button a third time for two seconds, and then release.  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter  
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of  
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal  
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.  
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured  
to time out in the same manner.  
The Universal Home Remote should now activate  
the garage door.  
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty  
programming a gate operator or garage door opener  
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”  
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3  
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the  
following:  
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote  
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the Universal  
Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as this will  
erase all previous programming from the Universal Home  
Remote buttons.  
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote  
button while you press and release every two seconds  
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the  
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the  
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote  
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.  
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal  
Home Remote” to complete.  
2-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Universal Home Remote  
Reprogramming a Single Universal  
Home Remote Button  
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote  
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light  
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.  
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote  
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier  
in this section, beginning with Step 2.  
Erasing Universal Home Remote  
Buttons  
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote  
System, call the customer assistance phone number  
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.  
The programmed buttons should be erased when the  
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.  
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal  
Home Remote device:  
Storage Areas  
Glove Box  
To open, press the button. Use the key to lock and  
unlock. The glove box has a shelf that can be removed  
by pulling it out.  
Cupholders  
The vehicle has cupholders located in front of the center  
console. Push down on the cover to open. There are  
also cupholders in the rear center armrest. Pull the  
armrest down to use.  
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until  
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.  
2. Release both buttons.  
2-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Storage  
Sunroof  
Your vehicle has a storage area located below the  
climate control systems. To access, push on the lid.  
If the vehicle has a power sunroof it will only operate  
when the ignition is turned on, or in ACC/ACCESSORY,  
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.  
Center Console Storage  
The sunroof switches are located on the overhead  
console.  
Your vehicle has a center console with an upper and  
lower storage area. To access the upper storage area,  
lift the driver side lever on the front of the console  
and lift the cover. To access the lower storage area,  
lift the passenger side lever on the center console.  
There is an additional storage area behind the center  
console. To access, push the cover.  
The driver side switch  
operates the sunshade.  
Convenience Net  
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear  
of the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. It can also  
be positioned into an envelope style to hold smaller  
items. The net is not for heavier loads. Store items as  
far forward as you can.  
Press and hold the rear of the switch to open the  
sunshade. Press and hold the front of the switch to  
close the sunshade.  
Express-Open: To open the sunshade, fully press and  
release the rear of the driver side switch. The sunshade  
will automatically open. To stop the sunshade partway,  
press the switch a second time.  
2-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Close: To close the sunshade, fully press and  
release the front of the driver side switch. The sunshade  
will automatically close. To stop the sunshade partway,  
press the switch a second time.  
Comfort Stop Feature: The sunroof has a comfort  
stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to  
the full-open position. From the comfort stop position,  
press the rear of the passenger side switch a second  
time to open the sunroof to the full-open position.  
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,  
but can also be opened manually.  
On vehicles equipped with an air deflector, it  
automatically raises when the sunroof opens and  
retracts when the sunroof closes.  
The passenger side switch  
operates the sunroof.  
Vent Feature: Press and hold the front of  
the passenger side switch to vent the sunroof.  
The sunshade will automatically open approximately  
one and a half inches. Press and hold the rear of the  
passenger side switch to close the sunroof vent.  
Anti-Pinch Feature  
Express-Open: To open the sunroof, fully press  
and release the rear of the passenger side switch.  
The sunroof will automatically open. To stop the  
sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.  
If an object is in the path of the sunroof/sunshade when  
it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object  
and stop the sunroof/sunshade from closing at the point  
of the obstruction. The sunroof/sunshade will then return  
to the full-open position. To close the sunroof/sunshade,  
see “Express-Close” earlier in this section.  
Express-Close: To close the sunroof, fully press and  
release the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof  
will automatically close. To stop the sunroof partway,  
press the switch a second time.  
2-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
2-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control  
Bluetooth® .................................................3-109  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
CTS Shown, CTS-V Similar  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:  
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-29.  
O. Hood Release on page 5-13.  
C. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-20.  
E. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-31.  
F. Windshield Wipers on page 3-9.  
P. Cruise Control on page 3-13. Traction Control  
System (TCS) Disable Button (CTS-V Model Only).  
Q. Tap Shift Controls (CTS-V Model Only). See  
on page 3-7.  
G. Navigation Button (If Equipped). See Navigation  
System Manual.  
(CTS-V Model Only).  
S. Horn on page 3-6.  
T. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-122.  
V. Dual Climate Control System on page 3-24.  
W. Electric Parking Brake on page 2-45.  
I. Analog Clock on page 3-23.  
J. Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63.  
K. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
on page 2-42.  
L. Navigation Display Brightness Control (If Equipped).  
See Navigation System Manual.  
M. Audio System(s) on page 3-80 (Base Audio System)  
or Navigation/Radio System on page 3-109  
(If Equipped).  
Power Outlet(s) on page 3-22.  
Z. Glove Box on page 2-65.  
N. Parking Brake on page 2-44.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel  
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel  
be adjusted.  
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button  
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and  
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns  
others that you are having trouble.  
The tilt and telescope lever  
is located on the left side  
of the steering column.  
Press | again to turn the flashers off.  
Horn  
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull the lever  
down. Then move the steering wheel up or down  
or backward or forward into a comfortable position.  
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic  
Steering Column  
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
P : Exterior Lamp Control  
For vehicles with this feature, the power tilt wheel  
control is located on the left side of the steering column.  
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up  
or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down.  
# : Fog Lamps  
Push the control forward or rearward to move the  
steering wheel toward the front or rear of the vehicle.  
Flash-To-Pass Feature.  
Information for these features is on the pages following.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal On Chime  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),  
a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON  
message will appear on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-57 for more information.  
An arrow on the instrument  
panel cluster flashes in the  
direction of the turn or  
lane change.  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever  
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.  
Pull the lever back and then release it to change  
from high to low beam.  
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.  
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash  
to signal a lane change. Hold it briefly until the lane  
change is complete. The arrow will automatically  
flash three times.  
If the vehicle is turned off while the high beams are on,  
they will come on the next time the vehicle is started.  
The highbeam light on the  
instrument panel cluster,  
comes on while the  
high-beam headlamps  
are on.  
The lever returns to its starting position when it is  
released.  
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes  
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be  
burned out.  
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,  
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on  
page 5-120.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Flash-to-Pass  
Windshield Wipers  
This feature allows the high-beam headlamps to be  
used to signal the driver in front of you that you  
want to pass.  
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward  
you to use this feature. When this is done the following  
will occur:  
If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the  
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will  
stay on as long as the lever is held there.  
Release the lever to turn them off.  
The lever on the right side of the steering column  
operates the windshield wipers.  
Move the lever to one of the following positions:  
For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID)  
headlamps, the low-beam headlamps must be on  
to activate the high-beam headlamps. See High  
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a  
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original  
position. Hold the lever in this position for continuous  
wiping cycles.  
If the headlamps are already in high-beam mode,  
they will remain on high-beam.  
& (Delay): For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the delay  
adjustment band to set the length of the delay.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rainsense™ Wipers  
6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the length  
of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature.  
Vehicles with Rainsense windshield wipers, have a  
moisture sensor for this feature mounted on the interior  
side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror. This  
sensor automatically operates the wipers by monitoring  
the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes  
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on  
driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In light rain  
or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow,  
wipes occur more frequently. If the system is left on for  
long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without  
any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and  
indicates that the Rainsense system is activated.  
The closer the band is moved towards 7 , the longer  
the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for  
this feature to work.  
1 (Low Speed): For slow, steady wiping cycles.  
2 (High Speed): For rapid wiping cycles.  
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds  
while you are driving, the exterior lamps come on  
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.  
See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-17 for more  
information.  
The wiper control should be left in the off position,  
unless the wiper is needed.  
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before  
using them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield,  
gently loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged,  
install new blades. For more information, see Windshield  
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-61.  
The Rainsense system is sensitive to vibration and  
can activate if something hits the windshield or if the  
vehicle hits a bump.  
Rainsense windshield wipers operate in a delay mode,  
as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed.  
Move the wiper lever up to the delay position and  
turn the band to one of five settings.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.  
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The level one or lowest setting is at the bottom of the  
band. This setting lets more rain or snow collect on  
the windshield between wipes. Turn the delay band  
forward to a higher setting to let less rain or snow  
collect on the windshield between wipes.  
Windshield Washer  
{ CAUTION:  
The top position is the highest setting. A single wipe  
occurs each time the delay band is turned to a higher  
setting to indicate that the Rainsense level has been  
increased.  
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until  
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer  
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking  
your vision.  
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with  
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers  
off when going through an automatic car wash.  
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this symbol,  
located at the end of the windshield washer lever, to  
wash the windshield. The washer fluid sprays onto the  
windshield and the wipers run for a few cycles to clear the  
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are  
not affected by the Rainsense function. The Rainsense  
system can be overridden at any time by manually  
changing the wiper control to low or high speed.  
The system will default to normal time delay operation  
if the Rainsensor detects something that would  
affect Rainsense operation.  
windshield. Press and hold K for more wash cycles.  
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57.  
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps turn  
on automatically. If it is dark, they remain on. See  
“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Wiper Activated  
Headlamps on page 3-17 for more information.  
If the headlamps are on while the windshield is being  
washed, the headlamp washers, if the vehicle has them,  
will also turn on. See “Headlamp Washer” following for  
more information.  
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on  
the exterior glass surface directly in front of  
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause  
the moisture sensor to malfunction.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
depending on the outside temperature. After the first  
wipe cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each of the  
remaining cycles. The system will automatically turn  
off after four wipe cycles have been completed or  
press _ again to turn it off. Heated Washer Fluid  
System Off displays on the DIC. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-57.  
Heated Windshield Washer  
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid  
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,  
or bugs from the windshield.  
The button is located  
on the climate control  
system panel.  
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is  
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,  
steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a  
short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.  
This is a normal condition.  
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the DIC  
when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-57.  
Push _ to begin four heated wipe cycles. Heating  
Washer Fluid Wash Wipes Pending displays on the DIC.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57. The first  
heated wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur,  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamp Washer  
Cruise Control  
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers.  
The headlamp washers clear debris from the  
headlamp lenses.  
{ CAUTION:  
The headlamp washers  
are located beneath the  
headlamps.  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not  
use the cruise control on winding roads or in  
heavy traffic.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.  
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can  
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose  
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.  
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)  
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot  
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work  
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).  
Pocated at the end of the  
windshield wiper lever, to wash the headlamps.  
Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.  
After the first wash, the headlamps will not be washed  
until the fifth press of the windshield washer button.  
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control  
turns off.  
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the  
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed  
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid  
is low, the headlamp washers will not work.  
If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak® system and begins  
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control,  
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When road conditions  
allow you to safely use it again, the cruise control  
can be turned back on.  
See Windshield Washer on page 3-11 for more  
information.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The cruise control buttons  
are located on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
Setting Cruise Control  
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or  
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.  
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster  
comes on after the cruise control has been set to  
the desired speed.  
{ CAUTION:  
CTS Shown, CTS-V  
Similar  
If you leave your cruise control on when you are  
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go  
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be  
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise  
control switch off until you want to use cruise  
control.  
I (On/Off): Press to turn the system on or off.  
The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise  
control is on.  
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the  
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.  
1. Press the I button.  
2. Get up to the desired speed.  
SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make  
the vehicle decelerate.  
3. Press the SETbutton located on the steering  
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without  
erasing the set speed from memory.  
wheel and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed  
and then the brake is applied. This shuts off the cruise  
control. But it does not need to be reset.  
To reduce the vehicle’s speed while using cruise  
control:  
Once the vehicle is driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h)  
or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.  
The vehicle goes back to the previously set speed and  
stays there.  
Press and hold the SET– button on the steering  
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then  
release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, press  
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.  
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about  
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.  
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Press and hold the +RES button on the steering  
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then  
release it.  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s  
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the  
vehicle slows down to the previously set cruise speed.  
To increase vehicle speed in small increments,  
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,  
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
Headlamps  
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon  
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.  
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the  
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When  
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower  
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. When the brakes  
are applied the cruise control turns off.  
The exterior lamp control is located towards the end of  
the turn signal/multifunction lever.  
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this  
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.  
The exterior lamp control has four positions:  
Ending Cruise Control  
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except the Daytime  
Running Lamps (DRL).  
There are four ways to end cruise control:  
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the headlamps on and off  
automatically, depending upon how much light is  
available outside of the vehicle.  
Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual and  
automatic transmissions).  
Press the clutch pedal to the floor (manual  
transmissions).  
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps  
together with the following:  
Press [ on the steering wheel.  
Press I on the steering wheel.  
Sidemarker Lamps  
Taillamps  
Erasing Speed Memory  
License Plate Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when  
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.  
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together  
with the previously listed lamps and lights.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wiper Activated Headlamps  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
This feature activates the headlamps and parking  
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use  
for about six seconds. For this feature to work,  
the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.  
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required  
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.  
The wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off,  
when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or the  
windshield wiper control is turned off.  
The DRL system will make either the reduced intensity  
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s come on  
when the following conditions are met:  
It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON/RUN or  
START.  
Headlamps on Reminder  
The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO and the  
headlamps are off.  
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control  
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position  
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.  
See Lights On Reminder on page 3-47 for additional  
information.  
The automatic transmission is not in P (Park).  
When DRL’s are on, only the reduced intensity  
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s will be on.  
The other exterior lamps and the instrument panel  
cluster will not be on.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it is dark  
enough outside, the DRL turns off and the low-beam  
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough outside,  
the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will turn  
back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the  
automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.  
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one  
minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to  
DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument  
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure  
the instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright  
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-20.  
Light Sensor  
The light sensor for the  
DRL and AUTO headlamp  
feature is located on top of  
the instrument panel.  
Turning the exterior lamp control to off or to the  
low-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL.  
If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned  
on instead, the DRL will still turn off.  
If the sensor is covered, it will prevent it from sensing  
light, and the exterior lamps or the Headlamps Suggested  
message will appear on the DIC whenever the ignition  
is on.  
This will work regardless of gear position and whether  
or not the parking brake is set.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps  
to work.  
Adaptive Forward Lighting System  
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFL) pivots  
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road  
illumination while turning. To enable AFL, set the  
exterior lamp switch on the multifunction lever to the  
AUTO position. Moving the switch out of the AUTO  
position will deactivate the system. AFL will operate  
when the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).  
AFL will not operate when the transmission is in  
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately operable after  
starting the vehicle; driving a short distance is required  
to calibrate the AFL. See Headlamps on page 3-16.  
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog  
lamps will also turn off. They will turn back on again  
when you change back to low-beam headlamps.  
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to  
be on along with the fog lamps.  
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver  
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the  
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking lamps  
or headlamps have been left on. This protects against  
draining the battery. The battery saver does not work if  
the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned  
to LOCK/OFF.  
Fog Lamps  
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty  
conditions. The fog lamp control is located on the turn  
signal/multifunction lever.  
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, turn  
the lamps back on with the exterior lamp control.  
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp band on the lever  
up to # and release it, to turn the fog lamps on or  
off. The band will return to its original position.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Brightness  
Parade Dimming  
This feature does not let the instrument panel  
backlight dim during daylight hours while the key  
is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. Parade  
dimming automatically works with the light sensor,  
located on top of the dashboard. If it is dark enough  
outside and the parking lamps are on, the backlight  
on the instrument panel can be adjusted by turning  
the instrument panel brightness knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lighting.  
See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-20.  
The knob with this symbol  
is located on the instrument  
panel to the left of the  
steering column.  
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten  
or dim the lights.  
Reading Lamps  
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.  
These lamps come on automatically when any door is  
opened.  
Entry Lighting  
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome  
lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control,  
when a door is opened or if the transmitter unlock button  
is pressed. If activated by the transmitter, the lighting  
stays on for about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system  
uses the light sensor on the instrument panel; so it must  
be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on. The  
lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is  
closed. They dim then turn off if the ignition key is turned  
to ON/RUN. They immediately turn off if the power locks  
are used.  
For manual operation, press the button next to each  
lamp to turn it on or off.  
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut  
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the  
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output  
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase  
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever  
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands  
of some accessories.  
Electric Power Management  
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)  
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state  
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best  
performance and extended life of the battery.  
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without  
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of  
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the  
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message  
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,  
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this  
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver  
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-57.  
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage  
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.  
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered  
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a  
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage  
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,  
an alert will be displayed.  
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical  
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.  
This is because the generator (alternator) may not  
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the  
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.  
Battery Run-Down Protection  
This feature helps to prevent battery drain if accessory  
lamps are left on. If accessory lamps such as the  
vanity mirror, cargo, reading, console, or glove box  
are left on, they automatically time-out after about  
20 minutes. To reset the battery protection, all of the  
above lamps must be turned off or the ignition must  
be in the ACC/ACCESSORY position.  
A high electrical load occurs when several of the  
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,  
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at  
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer  
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible  
with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown  
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem  
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on  
accessory power outlets.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect  
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular  
telephone.  
There are three accessory power outlets. There is an  
outlet located in the front storage area below the climate  
control system, one inside the center console storage  
bin, and one on the rear of the center console.  
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the  
vehicle can damage it or keep other components  
from working as they should. The repairs would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use  
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of  
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before  
adding electrical equipment.  
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. When not  
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.  
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause  
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang  
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the  
plug because the power outlets are designed for  
accessory power plugs only.  
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into  
a power outlet, the battery may drain causing the  
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This  
would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug  
all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter  
Analog Clock  
The vehicle may have two removable ashtrays and  
cigarette lighters. One ashtray can be placed into the  
instrument panel storage compartment and the other  
into the center console rear compartment. To use  
the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When  
it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.  
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel  
above the radio. The clock is not connected with  
any other vehicle system and runs by itself.  
To adjust the clock:  
1. Locate the adjustment buttons directly below the  
clock face.  
To empty the ashtrays, hold on to the edges of the bin  
and pull straight out. To reinstall, push the tray back  
into place.  
2. Push and hold the right adjustment button to move  
the clock hands forward or the left adjustment button  
to make the clock hands go backward. Holding either  
button down will cause the clock to advance faster.  
Release the button before the desired time is  
reached.  
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is  
heating does not let the lighter back away from  
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from  
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating  
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold  
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.  
3. Push and release either button to adjust the time  
by one minute increments until the desired time is  
reached.  
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items  
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other  
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly  
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items  
in the ashtray.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Operation  
Climate Controls  
AUTO (Automatic): The system automatically controls  
fan speed, air delivery, and air conditioning in order to  
heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.  
When the indicator light is on, the system is in full  
automatic operation. If the air delivery mode or fan  
setting is manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns  
off and displays will show the selected settings.  
Dual Climate Control System  
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can  
be controlled with this system.  
1. Press the AUTO button.  
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting  
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).  
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature  
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool  
any faster. If the system is set at the warmest  
temperature setting, it remains in manual mode  
at that temperature and it will not go into  
automatic mode.  
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather,  
the system delays turning on the fan until  
warm air is available. The system starts out  
blowing air at the floor, but can automatically  
change modes as the vehicle warms up to  
maintain the chosen temperature setting.  
A. Display  
B. Fan Control  
C. Power  
H. Temperature Control  
and Heated Seat  
I. Air Conditioning  
J. Recirculation/  
Outside Air  
D. AUTO  
E. PASS (Passenger  
Climate Control)  
F. Defrost  
K. Heated Windshield  
Washer  
G. Air Delivery Mode  
Control  
L. Rear Window  
Defogger  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The length of time needed for warm up depends on  
the outside temperature and the length of time that  
has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.  
Manual Operation  
O (Power): Press to turn the climate control system on  
or off. When the climate control system is turned off  
the air inlet defaults to outside air.  
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from  
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if  
necessary.  
D C (Fan Control): Press the buttons to increase or  
decrease the fan speed. Pressing either button cancels  
automatic operation and the system goes into manual  
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.  
The blower may reduce during an Onstar® session  
to limit background noise.  
English can be changed to metric units through the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71.  
Q / R (Temperature Control): The temperature can  
be adjusted separately for the driver and the passenger.  
Press to increase or decrease the automatic temperature  
settings.  
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at  
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air  
filter might need to be replaced. For more information,  
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.  
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to set a  
different temperature for the passenger. Then adjust  
the passenger temperature buttons to a comfortable  
setting.  
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the buttons to  
change the direction of the airflow. The current mode  
appears in the display screen. Changing the mode  
cancels the automatic operation and the system goes  
into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic  
operation.  
Pressing the PASS button again automatically sets the  
passenger’s temperature to the driver’s setting.  
Turning the passenger’s temperature display off does  
not shut the passenger’s climate control system off.  
The outboard air outlets always receive some airflow in  
every mode, except defrost.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change the current mode, select one of the following:  
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog  
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,  
with some air directed to the side windows. In this mode,  
the system automatically turns off recirculation and  
runs the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside  
temperature is at or below freezing.  
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel  
outlets.  
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument  
panel outlets and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,  
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air  
to the floor outlets.  
This mode can also cause the fan speed and air  
temperature to increase.  
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning  
system on or off and override the automatic system.  
When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor comes  
on automatically, as needed.  
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with  
some air directed to the windshield and outboard outlets.  
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or  
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor and side  
window outlets. When this mode is selected, the system  
turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning  
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below  
freezing. If recirculation is selected while in defog mode,  
it is cancelled after 10 minutes.  
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the  
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the  
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.  
This is normal.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M / F (Recirculation/Outside Air): Press this  
button to switch between recirculation and outside  
air modes. The indicator light comes on to show which  
mode is being used. The recirculation mode recirculates  
and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle.  
It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from  
entering the vehicle. Press the auto button to have  
the system select the best air delivery mode for  
the temperature setting.  
Rear Window Defogger  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog or frost from the rear window. It only works  
when the ignition is in ON/RUN.  
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear  
window defogger on or off.  
The rear window defogger stays on for about  
15 minutes, before turning off if the vehicle is moving  
at a slower speed. At higher speeds, the rear window  
defogger may stay on continuously. With each additional  
press, the defogger runs for about 10 minutes. The  
defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine.  
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and  
automatically turns off 10 minutes after defog is selected.  
This helps to limit window fogging in the vehicle.  
Using recirculation for long periods of time could cause  
the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or stuffy.  
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle  
has cooled, select outside air or press the auto button.  
The heated outside rearview mirrors turn on when the  
rear window defogger button is on and helps to clear  
fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Outside  
Heated Mirrors on page 2-54.  
The outside air mode pulls fresh air from outside the  
vehicle. Outside air is always selected in defrost mode to  
prevent fogging.  
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material  
from the inside of the front windshield and rear  
window with a razor blade or anything else that is  
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger  
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations  
clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your  
warranty.  
Heated and Ventilated Seats: Press to heat or  
ventilate the seat. See Heated and Ventilated Seats  
on page 1-7.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior temperature  
sensor located on the  
instrument panel to  
the right of the steering  
wheel, measures the  
temperature of the  
_ (Heated Windshield Washer, If Equipped): For  
more information, see Windshield Washer on page 3-11.  
Remote Start Climate Control Operation: For  
vehicles with remote vehicle start feature and it is  
activated, the climate control system heats and cools  
the inside of the vehicle using the previous settings  
of the system before the vehicle was turned off.  
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-15.  
air inside the vehicle.  
The windshield defroster and/or rear window defogger  
turn on if it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats,  
they turn on if the temperature inside the vehicle is cooler  
than 54°F (12.5°C) or if the outside temperature is cooler  
than 48°F (9°C).  
The climate control system uses the information from  
these sensors to adjust the fan speed and the air  
delivery, in order to maintain the selected temperature.  
The system may also supply cooler air to the side of  
the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode  
will also be activated, as necessary.  
Sensors  
The solar sensor located  
on the instrument panel,  
near the windshield,  
Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate  
control system will not work properly.  
monitors the solar heat.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outlet Adjustment  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter  
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side  
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the  
thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off  
the airflow.  
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of  
the dust and pollen from the air entering the vehicle.  
The filter will need to be changed periodically.  
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.  
Using the climate control system without the passenger  
air filter installed could let water or other debris enter  
the system. This could cause a water leak or noises.  
Make sure a new air filter is installed after removing  
the old one.  
Operation Tips  
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets  
at the base of the windshield that could block the  
flow of air into the vehicle.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects  
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more  
effectively.  
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can  
adversely affect the performance of the system.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding  
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.  
The passenger compartment air filter is located  
under the hood below the windshield wiper arm and  
the screen on the passenger side of the vehicle.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14  
for more information on location.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace the passenger compartment air filter:  
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and  
Indicators  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to  
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.  
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn the ignition  
off again when the wipers are straight up on the  
windshield.  
This allows access to the leaf screen.  
The passenger compartment air filter is  
located under the screen.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some  
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is  
started to indicate they are working.  
3. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.  
See Hood Release on page 5-13 for more  
information.  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and  
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with  
the vehicle.  
4. Remove the three screws that hold the screen in  
place and lift off the screen by lifting and sliding it  
toward the center of the vehicle.  
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end of the  
filter cover.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there  
may be a problem, check the section that explains  
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to  
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.  
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight up.  
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.  
for the correct part number for the filter.  
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the cover.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
The instrument panel cluster is designed to indicate how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is  
going, how much fuel the vehicle has used and many of the other things needed to drive safely and economically.  
United States Automatic Transmission Cluster shown, Manual and Canada similar  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
United States V–Series Automatic Transmission Cluster shown, Manual and Canada similar  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speedometer and Odometer  
Tachometer  
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in either  
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been  
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)  
or kilometers (used in Canada).  
If the vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,  
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is  
because the vehicle computer has stored the mileage  
in memory.  
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,  
the odometer changes to show the gear range.  
for more information.  
United States and  
Canada Automatic,  
V-Series Similar  
Trip Odometers  
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions  
per minute (rpm).  
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or  
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.  
Notice: If the engine is operated with the  
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle  
could be damaged, and the damages would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate  
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded  
warning area.  
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), for more information see DIC Operation  
and Displays on page 3-50.  
For vehicles that have the navigation system, see your  
Navigation System manual for more information.  
The CTS-V tachometer has tracer lights that follow the  
movement of the tachometer indicator.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights also flash when  
it is time to up-shift to avoid the engine speed limit.  
or Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-42 for  
more information.  
The safety belt light  
comes on and stays on  
for several seconds, then  
flashes for several more.  
Engine Speed Limiter  
This feature prevents the engine speed from reaching  
an unsafe level. If the level is too high, the throttle closes  
or limits the fuel supply until the engine speed returns  
to a safe level. Throttle operation and fuel supply returns  
to normal when engine speed is lowered.  
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains  
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver  
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor  
the light comes on.  
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light  
For the CTS-V, the tachometer tracer lights flashes prior  
to reaching engine speed limit. The tracer lights also  
flash on automatic transmission vehicles while in  
the DSC or Tap Shift modes.  
Several seconds after the engine is started, a  
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front  
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs  
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 1-63 for more information.  
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument  
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and  
then flashes for several more.  
Safety Belt Reminders  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for  
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety  
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This chime and light are  
repeated if the passenger  
remains unbuckled and  
the vehicle is in motion.  
The airbag readiness light  
flashes for a few seconds  
when the engine is started.  
If the light does not come  
on then, have it fixed  
immediately.  
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the  
chime nor the light comes on.  
{ CAUTION:  
The front passenger safety belt warning light and  
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such  
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other  
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or  
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the  
safety belt.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the  
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it  
means the airbag system might not be working  
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not  
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate  
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the  
vehicle serviced right away.  
Airbag Readiness Light  
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for  
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates  
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes  
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,  
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.  
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag  
System on page 1-55.  
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag  
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come  
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57  
for more information.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front  
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for  
important safety information. The instrument panel  
has a passenger airbag status indicator.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger  
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger  
frontal airbag.  
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be  
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing  
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
United States  
Canada  
{ CAUTION:  
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status  
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on  
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you  
are using remote start to start the vehicle from a  
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system  
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status  
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on  
or off symbol, to let you know the status of the right  
front passenger frontal airbag.  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Charging System Light  
Up-Shift Light  
This light comes on briefly  
The vehicle may have  
an up-shift light, it shows  
when to shift to the  
next higher gear for  
best fuel economy.  
when the ignition key is  
turned to START, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show it  
is working.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-42 for  
more information.  
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays  
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem  
with the charging system. A charging system message  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for  
more information. This light could indicate that there  
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there  
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.  
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the  
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air  
conditioner.  
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights function as a  
performance up-shift light.  
These tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the  
next higher gear to avoid the engine speed limit.  
for more information.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the light stays on after the parking brake is fully  
released there is a base brake problem.  
Brake System Warning Light  
This vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into  
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part  
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking  
both parts need to be working well.  
For vehicles with the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if the  
light continues flashing after the brake is released,  
or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric  
Parking Brake system.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.  
Have the brake system inspected right away.  
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road  
and stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push,  
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. The vehicle may  
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle  
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on  
page 4-26.  
{ CAUTION:  
United States  
Canada  
The brake system might not be working properly if  
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with  
the brake system warning light on can lead to a  
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has  
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,  
have the vehicle towed for service.  
This light should come on briefly when the ignition is  
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.  
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light  
will also come on when the parking brake is set.  
The light will flash or stay on if the parking brake is not  
fully released.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
Warning Light  
For vehicles with  
the Antilock Brake  
System (ABS), this light  
comes on briefly when  
the engine is started.  
For vehicles with the Electric Park Brake (EPB), this  
light should come on briefly when ignition is turned  
to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
If this light comes on there is a problem with a system  
on the vehicle that is causing the park brake system  
to work at a reduced level. The vehicle can still be  
driven, but should be taken to a dealer/retailer as  
soon as possible.  
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the  
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely  
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine  
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or  
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.  
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the  
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the  
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle  
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with  
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on  
page 3-38.  
See Electric Parking Brake on page 2-45 for more  
information.  
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),  
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for all  
brake related DIC messages.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control  
System (TCS) Warning Light  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
The Traction Control  
The engine coolant  
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak  
warning light should  
come on briefly when  
the engine is started.  
temperature warning light  
comes on briefly when  
the engine is started.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally  
the indicator light then goes off.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
If the light comes on or stays on while driving, there  
may be a problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak and the  
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on,  
the system does not limit wheel spin. Adjust driving  
accordingly.  
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, the  
vehicle may have a problem with the cooling system.  
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as  
possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning  
chime sounds when this light is on.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7 and  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information.  
See Engine Overheating on page 5-38 for more  
information.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
Tire Pressure Light  
For vehicles with a tire  
pressure monitoring  
system, this light comes  
on briefly when the engine  
is started.  
It provides information about tire pressures and the  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.  
United States  
Canada  
When the Light is On Steady  
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.  
If the engine coolant overheats the engine coolant  
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine  
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-40 for more  
information.  
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly  
underinflated.  
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for more  
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as  
it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate  
to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-63 for  
more information.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while  
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an  
OBD II problem and service is required.  
When the Light Flashes First and Then is  
On Steady  
This indicates that there could be a problem with the  
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about  
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the  
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition  
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-75  
for more information.  
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before  
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light  
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.  
This system assists the service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with  
this light on, after a while, the emission controls  
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy  
might not be as good, and the engine might not  
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs  
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation  
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.  
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels  
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
environment.  
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system  
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires  
with other than those of the same Tire Performance  
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission  
controls and can cause this light to come on.  
Modifications to these systems could lead to  
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.  
This could also result in a failure to pass a required  
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See  
This light should come on  
when the ignition is on, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show it  
is working. If it does not  
come on, have the vehicle  
serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of  
two ways:  
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by  
doing the following:  
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling  
the Tank on page 5-9. The diagnostic system  
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or  
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap  
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few  
driving trips with the cap properly installed should  
turn the light off.  
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.  
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could  
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service might be required.  
The following can prevent more serious damage to the  
vehicle:  
Reduce vehicle speed.  
Avoid hard accelerations.  
Avoid steep uphill grades.  
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle  
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.  
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical  
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the  
light off.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,  
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.  
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart  
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous  
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon  
as possible.  
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor  
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently  
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,  
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,  
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on  
acceleration. These conditions might go away once  
the engine is warmed up.  
Light On Steady: An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service might be required.  
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the  
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of  
the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your  
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer  
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to  
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might  
have developed.  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines  
that critical emission control systems have not been  
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle  
would be considered not ready for inspection. This  
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced  
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system  
is designed to evaluate critical emission control  
systems during normal driving. This can take several  
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the  
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of  
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can  
prepare the vehicle for inspection.  
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance  
Programs  
Some state/provincial and local governments have or  
might begin programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection  
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.  
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass  
an inspection:  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the  
key is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.  
For vehicles with a Keyless Access ignition,  
make sure the transmitter is in the passenger  
on page 2-33.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil Pressure Light  
{ CAUTION:  
For vehicles with an oil  
pressure light, if there  
is a problem with the oil, the  
light may stay on after the  
engine is started, or comes  
on while driving.  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.  
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.  
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon  
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
This light indicates that oil is not going through the  
engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine  
could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.  
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.  
The oil light could also come on in the following  
situations:  
The light comes on briefly when the ignition is  
turned on to show that it is working properly.  
If it does not come on with the ignition on, there  
may be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have  
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.  
Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a  
chime sounds and the light may blink on and off.  
This is normal.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A reading outside the normal operating range may be  
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other  
problem causing low oil pressure. Oil should be checked  
as soon as possible. See Oil pressure Low Stop Engine  
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 and  
Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
Engine Oil Pressure Gage  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.  
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.  
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon  
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.  
United States  
Canada  
For vehicles with an engine oil pressure gage. It shows  
the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch)  
when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate  
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside  
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside  
the normal operating range, the oil pressure light will  
come on. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-45 for more  
information.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Light  
Lights On Reminder  
For information regarding  
this light and the vehicle’s  
security system, see  
on page 2-27.  
This light comes on  
whenever the parking  
lamps are on.  
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-17 for more  
information.  
Fog Lamp Light  
Cruise Control Light  
The fog lamp light comes  
on when the fog lamps are  
in use.  
The cruise control light  
comes on whenever the  
cruise control is set.  
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.  
See Fog Lamps on page 3-19 for more information.  
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.  
See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more information.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the  
vehicle the fuel door is on.  
Highbeam On Light  
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message  
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)  
and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-57 for more information.  
This light comes on when  
the high-beam headlamps  
are in use.  
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about  
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and  
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:  
At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before  
the gage reads full.  
for more information.  
The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly  
or accelerate quickly.  
Fuel Gage  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than  
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may  
have indicated that the tank was half full, but  
it actually took a little more or less than half the  
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.  
The fuel gage shows  
approximately how much  
fuel is in the fuel tank.  
It works only when  
the ignition is in the  
ON/RUN position.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Boost Gage  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the  
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also  
used to display warning/status messages. All messages  
appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the  
instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons are located  
on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short  
delay, the DIC displays the information that was last  
displayed before the engine was turned off.  
The top line of the DIC display shows the DIC  
information. The bottom line of the DIC display shows  
the compass. The compass displays in the trip/fuel  
menus and in some vehicle information menus.  
United States  
Canada  
For the CTS-V, this gage is located in the instrument  
panel cluster.  
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears  
on the display. Take any message that appears on  
the display seriously and remember that clearing  
the message only makes the message disappear,  
and does not correct the problem.  
This gage indicates positive manifold pressure which is  
the induction air pressure level in the intake manifold  
before it enters the combustion chamber. This gage  
reads zero under light throttle before boost is generated.  
This gage automatically resets to zero every time the  
engine is started.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC  
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages  
and clear them from the DIC display.  
DIC Operation and Displays  
The Driver Information  
Center (DIC) has different  
displays which can be  
accessed by pressing the  
DIC buttons located on  
the instrument panel, next  
to the steering wheel.  
y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up  
and down the menu items.  
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items  
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can  
be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:  
Odometer  
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been  
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).  
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the  
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu  
Items” following for more information on these displays.  
Trip A or Trip B  
These displays show the current distance traveled since  
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or  
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the  
same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero  
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset button  
for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is  
displayed.  
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll  
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle  
Information Display Menu Items” following for more  
information on these displays.  
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through  
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-71 for more information on  
the customization features.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuel Range  
Timer  
This display shows the approximate number of  
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive  
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on  
the current driving conditions and changes if the driving  
conditions change. For example, if you are driving in  
traffic and making frequent stops, the display may read  
one number, but if you enter the freeway, the number  
may change even though you still have the same amount  
of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different driving  
conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally,  
freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city  
driving.  
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can  
record the time it takes to travel from one point to  
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel  
button until Timer 00:00:00 displays.  
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until the  
timer starts.  
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again.  
The timer stops and displays the end timing value.  
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset  
button after the timer has been stopped.  
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy  
Once the range drops below about 30 miles (48 km)  
remaining, the display shows Low Range.  
This display shows the current fuel economy in either  
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers  
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy  
that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently  
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,  
this display cannot be reset.  
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low message  
displays. See “Fuel Level Low” under DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-57 for more information.  
AVG (Average) Economy  
This display shows the approximate average miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).  
This number is calculated based on the number of  
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display  
was reset. To reset this display to zero, press the  
set/reset button.  
AVG (Average) Speed  
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in  
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle  
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.  
To reset this display to zero, press the set/reset button.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Oil Life must be reset after each oil change. It does  
not reset itself. Avoid accidental resetting of the Oil Life  
system. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil  
change. To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine  
Oil Life System on page 5-21. The display shows 100%  
when the system is reset.  
Speedometer  
This display shows a digital speedometer in the DIC.  
The speed displays in either miles per hour (mph)  
or kilometers per hour (km/h). To change the units  
from English to metric, see “Units” later in this section.  
Blank Display  
Units  
This display shows no information.  
This display allows you to select between English or  
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display,  
press the set/reset button to select between English  
or Metric units.  
Vehicle Information Display Menu  
Items  
Parking Assist  
T (Vehicle Information): The following display  
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle  
information button:  
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist  
(URPA) system, this display allows the system to  
be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the  
set/reset button to select between On or Off. The URPA  
system automatically turns back on after each vehicle  
start. When the URPA system is turned off and the  
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC displays the  
Parking Assist Off message as a reminder that the  
system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings  
Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-54 for more  
information.  
Oil Life Remaining  
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil  
life remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life Remaining on  
the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life  
remains.  
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil  
Soon message appears on the display. You should  
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the  
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional  
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance  
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Pressure  
Calibrate Compass  
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.  
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per  
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the  
vehicle information button until the DIC displays  
Front Tire PSI (kPa) Left ## Right ##. Press the  
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays  
Rear Tire PSI (kPa) Left ## Right ##.  
The vehicle may have this feature. The compass can be  
manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass through  
the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 3-55.  
Change Compass Zone  
The vehicle may have this feature. To change the  
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass  
on page 3-55.  
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by  
the system while driving, a message advising you  
to check the pressure in a specific tire appears in the  
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72 and  
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for more  
information.  
Relearn Remote Key  
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
system, this display allows you to match the transmitter  
to the vehicle. This procedure will erase all previously  
learned transmitters. Therefore, they must be relearned  
as additional transmitters.  
Battery Voltage  
This display shows the current battery voltage.  
The vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage  
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage  
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.  
This is normal.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, see  
instructions on matching a keyless access transmitter  
to the vehicle.  
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,  
the charging system light illuminates and/or the DIC  
displays a message. See Charging System Light  
on page 3-37, DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-57 and Electric Power Management on  
page 3-21 for more information.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To match an RKE transmitter to the vehicle:  
Trans (Transmission) Temp (Temperature)  
(CTS-V Only)  
1. Press the vehicle information button until  
Press V To Relearn Remote Key displays.  
This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in  
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).  
2. Press the set/reset button until Remote Key  
Learning Active is displayed.  
Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)  
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on  
the first transmitter at the same time for about  
15 seconds.  
This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per  
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).  
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first  
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and  
the second will match driver 2.  
Coolant Temp (Temperature) (CTS-V Only)  
This display shows the engine coolant temperature in  
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).  
A chime sounds indicating that the transmitter is  
matched.  
Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only)  
4. To learn additional transmitters at this time, repeat  
Step 3.  
Lateral acceleration is a measure of how hard you  
are taking a corner. For example, when you are turning  
right you will feel your body push to the left. This force  
is measured in a “g”. This gage will display from  
0.0 g to 2.0 g.  
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight learned  
transmitters.  
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the  
key to LOCK/OFF.  
Blank Display  
This display shows no information.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIC Compass  
The vehicle may have a compass in the Driver  
Information Center (DIC).  
Compass Zone  
The zone is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone  
eight or drive out of the area, the variance needs to  
be changed to the appropriate zone.  
To adjust for compass variance, use the following  
procedure:  
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure  
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle  
is moving. On an automatic transmission vehicle,  
only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).  
On a manual transmission vehicle, only set it  
when the vehicle is stopped.  
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance  
zone number on the map.  
Press the vehicle information button until  
Press V To Change Compass Zone displays.  
Zones 1 through 15 are available.  
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and  
select the appropriate variance zone.  
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,  
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.  
5. Calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration  
Procedure” following.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:  
Compass Calibration  
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate  
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,  
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle  
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate  
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,  
or other industrial structures, if possible.  
Compass Calibration Procedure  
1. Before calibrating the compass, check that the  
compass is set to the correct variance zone.  
See “Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure”  
earlier in this section.  
Do not operate any switches such as window,  
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during  
the calibration procedure.  
If CAL appears in the DIC display, the compass should  
be calibrated.  
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for  
example, N for North, or the heading does not change  
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field  
interfering with the compass. Interference may be caused  
by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder,  
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the  
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the  
compass.  
2. Press the vehicle information button until  
Press V To Calibrate Compass displays.  
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass  
calibration.  
4. The DIC will display Calibrating Drive In Circles.  
Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than  
5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. The DIC  
will display Calibration Complete for a few seconds  
when the calibration is complete. The DIC display  
will then return to Press V To Calibrate Compass.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AFL (Adaptive Forward Lighting)  
Lamps Need Service  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the  
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and  
that some action may be needed by the driver to correct  
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after  
another.  
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward  
Lighting (AFL) system is disabled and needs service.  
See your dealer/retailer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting  
System on page 3-19 for more information.  
Some messages may not require immediate action,  
All Wheel Drive Off  
but you can press V (Set/Reset) to acknowledge that  
you received the messages and to clear them from  
the display.  
If the vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,  
this message displays when there is a temporary  
condition making the AWD system unavailable.  
The vehicle will run in 2WD. This could be caused by:  
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC  
display because they are more urgent. These messages  
require action before they can be cleared. You should  
take any messages that appear on the display seriously  
and remember that clearing the messages will only  
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.  
Loss of wheel or vehicle speed  
AWD system overheat  
Certain vehicle electrical conditions  
This message turns off when the above conditions  
are no longer present and by resetting the warning  
message.  
The following are the possible messages that can be  
displayed and some information about them.  
Accessory Mode Active  
To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off  
and then back on again after 30 seconds. If the  
message stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away.  
See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-9 for  
more information.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when the accessory mode is active.  
for more information.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Light Control Off  
Battery Volts Low  
This message displays when the automatic headlamps  
are turned off.  
This message displays when the electrical system is  
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been  
drained.  
Automatic Light Control On  
If this message appears immediately after starting the  
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge  
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving,  
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using  
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning  
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions.  
This message displays when the automatic headlamps  
are turned on.  
Battery Saver Active  
This message displays when the system detects that the  
battery voltage is dropping below expected levels. The  
battery saver system starts reducing certain features of  
the vehicle that you may be able to notice. At the point  
that the features are disabled, this message is displayed.  
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in  
the battery.  
If this message appears while driving or after starting  
the vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately  
to determine the cause of this problem.  
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,  
you can reduce the load on the electrical system  
by turning off the accessories.  
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery  
to recharge.  
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.  
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing  
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is  
displayed.  
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.  
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing  
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is  
displayed.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calibrating Drive In Circles  
Check Tire Pressure  
This message displays when calibrating the compass.  
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)  
to complete the calibration. See DIC Compass on  
page 3-55 for more information.  
This message displays when the pressure in one or  
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. It also  
displays Left Front, Right Front, Left Rear, or Right  
Rear to indicate which tire. More than one tire pressure  
message can be received at a time. To read the other  
messages, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure  
message appears, stop as soon as you can. Have the  
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the  
Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 5-63,  
Pressure on page 5-72. The DIC display also shows the  
tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays on  
page 3-50. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure  
warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on  
page 3-41.  
Calibration Complete  
This message displays when the compass calibration is  
complete. See DIC Compass on page 3-55 for more  
information.  
Change Engine Oil Soon  
When this message displays, it means that service  
is required for the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.  
See Engine Oil on page 5-18 and Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.  
Cruise Set To XXX MPH (km/h)  
When you reset the Change Engine Oil Soon message  
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset  
the engine oil life system separately. For more  
information on resetting the engine oil life system,  
see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21.  
This message displays whenever the cruise control  
is set. See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more  
information.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Differential Hot, Reduce Speed  
(CTS-V Only)  
Electronic Key Not Detected  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays if the vehicle does not detect the  
presence of a transmitter when you have attempted  
to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed.  
The following conditions may cause this message  
to appear:  
This message displays and a chime sounds if the  
differential fluid temperature exceeds 300°F (150°C).  
Driving aggressively or at high speeds can cause  
the differential fluid temperature to be higher than  
normal. If this message appears, you may continue  
to drive at a slower speed. If you have been operating  
the vehicle under normal driving conditions, the  
vehicle may need service. See your dealer/retailer  
for an inspection.  
Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory  
power outlet on the center console is causing  
interference. Examples of these devices are cell  
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,  
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the  
keyless access transmitter away from these devices  
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices  
and remote garage and gate openers may also  
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that  
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.  
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the  
same pocket or bag as these devices.  
To acknowledge the message, press V . The message  
reappears and a chime sounds every two minutes  
until this condition changes. If you do not clear  
the message, it will remain on until the condition  
changes.  
Driver Door Open  
This message displays when the driver door is not  
closed completely. Close the door completely.  
The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic  
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,  
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations have  
EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless  
access transmitter.  
Electronic Key Already Known  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays if you try to match a transmitter  
that has already been learned. See Keyless Access  
System Operation on page 2-9 for more information.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic Key Not Detected Restart  
Allowed  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when the keyless access transmitter  
is not detected inside the vehicle while you are trying to  
turn the ignition off. The vehicle may be near a strong  
radio antenna signal causing the keyless access system  
to be jammed. If you have the keyless access transmitter  
with you, get out of the vehicle and lock the doors. If you  
do not have the keyless access transmitter with you, you  
will be able to start the vehicle again within five minutes,  
or until the vehicle’s content theft deterrent system is  
armed. See Starting the Engine on page 2-34 for more  
information.  
If moving the transmitter to different locations within  
the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the  
center console transmitter pocket with the buttons facing  
the front of the vehicle and then start the vehicle.  
Engine Hot A/C (Air Conditioning) Off  
This message displays when the engine coolant  
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.  
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air  
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.  
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,  
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.  
You can continue to drive the vehicle.  
The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery  
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless  
access transmitter to be detected properly.  
If this message continues to appear, have the system  
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible  
to avoid damage to the engine.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Oil Low Add Oil  
Engine Power Is Reduced  
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message  
displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the  
oil level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let  
the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to  
be sure this message clears.  
This message displays when the engine power is  
being reduced to protect the engine from damage.  
There could be several malfunctions that might cause this  
message. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s  
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no  
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.  
The performance may be reduced the next time the  
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced  
speed while this message is on, but acceleration and  
speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,  
the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for  
service as soon as possible.  
This message clears itself after 10 seconds, until the  
next ignition cycle. See Engine Oil on page 5-18  
for additional information.  
Engine Overheated Idle Engine  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.  
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument  
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as  
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above  
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating  
on page 5-38 for more information.  
Fuel Level Low  
This message displays when the vehicle is low on fuel.  
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A chime may  
sound when this message displays. See Filling the Tank  
on page 5-9.  
This message displays when the engine coolant  
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle  
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant  
Heated Washer Fluid Wash (Washer)  
Wipes Pending  
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays  
when you turn on the heated windshield washer  
fluid system. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under  
Windshield Washer on page 3-11 for more information.  
page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe place  
in an emergency.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heated Washer Fluid System Off  
Left Rear Door Open  
This message displays when the driver side rear door  
is not closed completely. Make sure that the door  
is closed completely.  
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays  
when you manually turn off the heated windshield  
washer fluid system or when the system automatically  
turns off. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under  
Windshield Washer on page 3-11 for more information.  
This message clears itself after 10 seconds.  
Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when the maximum number of  
transmitters have been learned. See Keyless Access  
System Operation on page 2-9 for more information.  
Hood Open  
This message displays when the hood is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed  
completely.  
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may  
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on  
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle  
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.  
See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more information.  
Ice Possible Drive With Care  
This message displays when the outside temperature  
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
Learn Delay Active Wait  
XX Min (Minutes)  
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine  
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light may also  
appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil  
Pressure Light on page 3-45. See Engine Oil on  
page 5-18 for more information.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when matching new transmitters to  
on page 2-9 for more information.  
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can  
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have  
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon  
as possible when this message is displayed.  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park Brake Released  
Press Brake Pedal to Release Park  
Brake  
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this  
message displays when the parking brake has been  
released from the set position. See Electric Parking  
Brake on page 2-45 for more information.  
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this  
message displays if you try to release the park  
brake system without first pressing the brake pedal.  
See Electric Parking Brake on page 2-45 for more  
information.  
Park Brake Set  
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this  
message displays when the parking brake has been  
applied to the set position. See Electric Parking Brake  
on page 2-45 for more information.  
Press Brake To Start Engine  
(Automatic Transmission Only)  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays if you try to start the engine without  
having the brake pressed. The brake needs to be  
pressed when starting the engine. See Ignition Positions  
Access) on page 2-33 for more information.  
Parking Assist Off  
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking  
Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been  
started, this message displays to remind the driver  
that the URPA system has been turned off. Press the  
set/reset button to acknowledge this message and clear  
it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system  
back on, see “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation and  
Assist (URPA) on page 2-54 for more information.  
Press Start Control To Learn Keys  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when matching new transmitters to  
on page 2-9 for more information.  
Passenger Door Open  
This message displays when the passenger side front  
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is  
closed completely.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rainsense Wipers Active  
Replace Battery In Remote Key  
If the vehicle has this feature, this message  
displays while the Rainsense™ wipers are active.  
See Rainsense™ Wipers on page 3-10 for more  
information.  
This message displays when the battery in the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter needs  
to be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery  
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation on page 2-9.  
Ready To Learn Electronic Key # X  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays while matching new transmitters to  
on page 2-9 for more information.  
Right Rear Door Open  
This message displays when the passenger side rear  
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is  
closed completely.  
Release Park Brake Switch  
Rotate Control To Off Position  
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this  
message displays if the Park Brake switch is pulled  
while the vehicle is moving. See Electric Parking Brake  
on page 2-45 for more information.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,  
this message displays when the ignition is in ACC/  
ACCESSORY and the shift lever has just been moved  
to P (Park). The message displays as a reminder to turn  
the ignition off. To avoid draining the battery, make sure  
the ignition is turned off before leaving the vehicle.  
Remote Key Learning Active  
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
system, this message displays while matching new  
transmitters to the vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s)  
to Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
Displays on page 3-50 for more information.  
Service Air Bag  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the airbag system. Have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-35 for more information.  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service A/C System  
Service Battery Charging System  
This message displays when the electronic sensors that  
control the air conditioning and heating systems are  
no longer working. Have the climate control system  
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in  
heating and air conditioning efficiency.  
This message displays when there is a problem with the  
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this  
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary  
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is  
safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your  
dealer/retailer. Under certain conditions, the charging  
system light may also turn on in the instrument panel  
cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-37 for  
more information.  
Service All Wheel Drive  
This message displays if a problem occurs with the  
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system. The vehicle will run in  
2WD. This could be caused by:  
Service Brake Assist  
An electronics problem  
This message displays if there is a problem with the  
brake system. The brake system warning light and the  
antilock brake system (ABS) warning light may also  
display on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake  
System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-39 for more  
information. Stop as soon as possible and turn off the  
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message  
on the DIC display. If the message displays immediately  
or again after you begin driving, the brake system  
needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon as  
possible. See Brakes on page 5-44 for more information.  
An AWD system oil overheat  
Worn out or overheated clutch plates  
Various electrical issues  
If this message appears, stop as soon as possible  
and turn off the ignition for 30 seconds. Restart  
the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC  
display. If the message is still displayed or appears  
again when you begin driving, the system needs service.  
See your dealer/retailer right away.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Brake System  
Service Power Steering  
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when  
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning  
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38 for more  
information. Have the brake system serviced by your  
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.  
This message displays if a problem is detected with  
the speed variable assist steering system. When this  
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort  
required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier,  
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. See Steering  
on page 4-10.  
Service Keyless Start System  
Service Stabilitrak  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays when there is a problem with this  
feature. See your dealer/retailer.  
This message displays if there has been a problem  
detected with the StabiliTrak® system. The TCS/  
StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument panel  
cluster also comes on.  
Service Park Brake  
If this message comes on while you are driving,  
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.  
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then  
back on. If this message still stays on or comes back on  
again while you are driving, the vehicle needs service.  
Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your dealer/  
retailer as soon as possible. See StabiliTrak® System  
on page 4-6 for more information.  
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this  
message displays if a problem is detected with the  
electric parking brake system. See your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
Service Parking Assist  
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist  
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is  
a problem with the URPA system. See Ultrasonic  
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-54 for more  
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
Service Suspension System  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the Magnetic Ride Control system. See Magnetic Ride  
Control™ on page 4-9 for more information. Have  
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Theft Deterrent System  
Service Traction Control  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault  
has been detected in the system which means that the  
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.  
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to  
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off  
page 2-30 for more information.  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the Traction Control System (TCS). The TCS/StabiliTrak  
warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes  
on. When this message displays, the system will not limit  
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your  
dealer/retailer for service. See Traction Control  
System (TCS) on page 4-7 for more information.  
Service Transmission  
This message displays when there is a problem with the  
vehicle’s transmission. Have the vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer.  
Service Tire Monitor System  
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure  
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire  
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during  
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on  
page 3-41. Several conditions may cause this message  
page 5-76 for more information. If the warning comes  
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.  
See your dealer/retailer.  
Service Vehicle Soon  
This message displays when a non-emissions related  
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shift To Park (Automatic  
Transmission Only)  
Stabilitrak Competitive Mode  
This message displays when the Competitive Driving  
mode is selected. When in this mode, the Traction  
Control System (TCS) will not be operating and  
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will turn on. Adjust  
your driving accordingly. See “Competitive Driving  
page 4-7 for more information.  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this  
message displays if the vehicle is not in P (Park)  
while the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will  
be in ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift lever is moved  
to P (Park), the ignition needs to be turned off. If the  
ignition is not turned off, the vehicle will remain in  
ACC/ACCESSORY. To avoid draining the battery,  
turn the ignition to off before leaving the vehicle.  
Stabilitrak Not Ready  
This message may display after first driving the vehicle  
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.  
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument  
panel cluster also comes on. The StabiliTrak system  
is not functional until the message has turned off. See  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information.  
Speed Limited To XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message displays when the vehicle speed is limited  
to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle detects a  
problem in the speed variable assist steering, magnetic  
ride control, or automatic leveling control systems.  
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.  
Sport Mode  
This message displays when the vehicle is in sport  
mode. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic  
Transmission Operation on page 2-37 for more  
information.  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stabilitrak Off  
Start Aborted By Theft Deterrent  
This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak,  
or when the stability control has been automatically  
disabled. The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on  
the instrument panel cluster also comes on.  
This message displays if there is a communication  
problem between the keyless access system and  
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be started when this  
message displays. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
To realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement  
system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on.  
To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off, see StabiliTrak®  
System on page 4-6.  
Suspension Mode Sport  
(CTS-V Only)  
This message will be displayed when sport mode is  
selected using the Magnetic Ride Control button in the  
center of the instrument panel. See Magnetic Ride  
Control™ on page 4-9 for more information.  
There are several conditions that can cause this  
message to appear.  
One condition is overheating, which could occur if  
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended  
period of time.  
Suspension Mode Tour (CTS-V Only)  
This message will be displayed when touring mode  
is selected using the Magnetic Ride Control button in  
the center of the instrument panel. See Magnetic  
Ride Control™ on page 4-9 for more information.  
The message also displays if the brake system  
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning  
Light on page 3-38.  
The message could display if the stability system  
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic  
checks due to driving conditions.  
Theft Attempted  
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system  
has detected a break-in attempt while you were away  
from the vehicle. See Theft-Deterrent System on  
page 2-27 for more information.  
The message displays if an engine or vehicle  
related problem has been detected and the vehicle  
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.  
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that  
caused the message to be displayed are no longer  
present.  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tighten Gas Cap  
Turn Signal On  
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been  
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it  
is on and tightened properly.  
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the  
turn signal if you drive the vehicle for more than about  
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple  
chime sounds when this message displays.  
Tire Learning Active  
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid  
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor  
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on  
the vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after  
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80,  
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-75, and  
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72 for more  
information.  
This message displays when the vehicle is low on  
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer  
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 5-42 for more information.  
DIC Vehicle Customization  
Vehicle customization allows certain features to be  
programmed for one preferred setting.  
Transmission Hot Idle Engine  
This message displays when the transmission fluid in  
the vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle  
until the transmission cools down or until this message  
is removed.  
Only the customization options available will be  
displayed on the DIC.  
The default settings were preset when the vehicle left  
the factory, but may have been changed.  
Trunk Open  
The customization preferences are automatically  
recalled.  
This message displays when the trunk is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed  
completely.  
To change customization preferences, use the following  
procedure.  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Language  
Entering the Feature Settings Menu  
This feature allows you to select the language in which  
the DIC messages will appear.  
1. Turn the ignition on.  
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is  
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.  
Press the customization button until the Display  
Language screen appears on the DIC display. Press  
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this  
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature  
settings menu.  
Feature Settings Menu Items  
English (default): All messages will appear in English.  
Deutsch: All messages will appear in German.  
Italiano: All messages will appear in Italian.  
Francais: All messages will appear in French.  
Espanol: All messages will appear in Spanish.  
Portugese: All messages will appear in Portugese.  
Arabic: All messages will appear in Arabic.  
The following are customization features that allow you  
to program settings to the vehicle:  
Display In English  
This feature will only display if a language other than  
English has been set. This feature allows for changing  
the language of the DIC messages back to English.  
Press the customization button until the  
Press V To Display In English screen appears  
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to select English as the language in which  
all DIC messages will appear.  
Chinese: All messages will appear in Chinese.  
Japanese: All messages will appear in Japanese.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Door Lock  
Auto Door Unlock  
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s  
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable  
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-18 for more  
information.  
This feature allows you to select whether or not the  
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to  
select which doors and when they will automatically  
page 2-18 for more information.  
Press the customization button until Auto Door Lock  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Press the customization button until Auto Door Unlock  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
Shift Out Of Park (default on Automatic  
Transmission) (Automatic Transmission Only):  
The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the doors  
are closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).  
Off: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
Driver Only At Off: Only the driver’s door will unlock  
when the ignition is turned off.  
At Vehicle Speed (default on Manual Transmission):  
The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the vehicle  
speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.  
All At Off (default on Manual Transmission): All of  
the doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.  
All In Park (default on Automatic Transmission)  
(Automatic Transmission Only): All of the doors will  
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights Only: The exterior lamps will flash when you  
press the lock button on the transmitter.  
Remote Door Lock Feedback  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter,  
or when the vehicle is automatically locked using the  
Keyless Locking feature. You will not receive feedback  
when locking the vehicle with the transmitter if the doors  
Operation on page 2-9, or “Keyless Locking” later  
in this section for more information.  
Horn Only: The horn will sound on the second press of  
the lock button on the transmitter.  
Horn & Lights (default): The exterior lamps will flash  
when you press the lock button on the transmitter, and  
the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again  
within five seconds of the previous command.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Press the customization button until Remote Door  
Lock appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
Off: There will be no feedback when you press the lock  
button on the transmitter.  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Door Unlock Feedback  
Exit Lighting  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with  
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access  
transmitter, or when the vehicle is automatically  
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock feature. You will not  
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the  
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless  
Access System Operation on page 2-9, or “Keyless  
Unlock” later in this section for more information.  
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you  
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark  
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned  
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.  
Press the customization button until Exit Lighting  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
Off: The exterior lamps will not turn on.  
Press the customization button until Remote Door  
Unlock appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
10 Seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on  
for 10 seconds.  
30 Seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
30 seconds.  
Lights Off: The exterior lamps will not flash when you  
press the unlock button on the transmitter.  
2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
two minutes.  
Lights On (default): The exterior lamps will flash when  
you press the unlock button on the transmitter.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Approach Lighting  
Factory Settings  
This feature allows you to select whether or not to  
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light  
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter.  
This feature allows you to set all of the customization  
features back to their factory default settings.  
Press the customization button until Factory Settings  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
Press the customization button until Approach Lighting  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Restore All (default): The customization features will  
be set to their factory default settings.  
Off: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock  
the vehicle with the transmitter.  
No Change: The customization features will not be set  
to their factory default settings.  
On (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior  
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle  
with the transmitter.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock  
button on the transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is  
Operation on page 2-9 for more information.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To select whether the horn sounds or the lights flash  
when the vehicle is locked, see “Remote Door  
Lock” earlier in this section.  
Keyless Locking  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,  
this feature allows you to select whether the doors  
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When  
the ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,  
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access  
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least  
one keyless access transmitter has been removed  
from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after  
several seconds.  
Press the customization button until Keyless Locking  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
Off (default): The keyless locking feature will be  
disabled.  
For example, if there are two keyless access  
On: The keyless locking feature will be enabled.  
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the  
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter  
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle  
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching  
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized  
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able  
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.  
for more information.  
The doors will automatically lock several seconds  
after you turn the ignition off, remove a keyless access  
transmitter from the interior of the vehicle, and close all  
of the doors.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
You may temporarily disable the keyless locking feature  
by pressing the door unlock switch for three seconds  
on an open door. Keyless locking will then remain  
disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or until  
the power mode transitions from the off power mode.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyless Unlock  
Chime Volume  
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,  
this feature allows you to select which doors will  
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle  
with the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s  
page 2-9 for more information.  
This feature allows you to select the volume level of  
the chime.  
Press the customization button until Chime Volume  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
To select whether the lights flash when the vehicle is  
unlocked, see “Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this  
section.  
Normal: The chime volume will be set to a normal  
level.  
Press the customization button until Keyless Unlock  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
Loud: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will  
stay at the last known setting.  
Entry Door Only (default): Only the driver’s door will  
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle with  
the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s  
door. The rest of the doors will unlock if the driver’s  
door handle is pulled a second time.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
All Doors: All doors will automatically unlock when you  
approach the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter  
and open the driver’s door.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
open the driver door, the seat and steering column will  
stay in the original exit position, unless a memory recall  
took place prior to opening the driver door again.  
Easy Exit Recall  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.  
page 1-8 for more information.  
Automatic On (Key Access default): If the features  
are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup menu, the  
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the  
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the  
power steering column will move up and forward when  
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing  
the easy exit seat button. The automatic easy exit seat  
movement will only occur one time after the key is  
removed from the ignition. If the automatic movement  
has already occurred, and you put the key back in  
the ignition and remove it again, the seat and steering  
column will stay in the original exit position, unless  
a memory recall took place prior to removing the key  
again.  
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Recall  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Automatic Off: No automatic seat exit recall will occur.  
The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit  
seat button.  
Automatic On (Keyless Access default): If the  
features are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup menu,  
the driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle  
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature,  
the power steering column will move up and forward  
when the vehicle is parked and the driver door is  
opened, or after pressing the easy exit seat button.  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur  
one time after the driver door is opened. If the automatic  
movement has already occurred, and you close and then  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Exit Setup  
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit  
seat feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic  
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and  
Steering Wheel on page 1-8 and “Easy Exit Recall”  
earlier for more information.  
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of  
the following occurs:  
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.  
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are  
pressed.  
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Setup  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
The end of the feature settings menu is reached  
and exited.  
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no  
selection made.  
Off: No automatic seat exit will recall.  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the  
following pages to become familiar with its features.  
Tilt/Telescope: The steering wheel tilt and steering  
column telescope features will recall.  
All (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel  
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,  
if the vehicle has this option.  
{ CAUTION:  
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods  
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to  
you or others. Do not give extended attention to  
entertainment tasks while driving.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This system provides access to many audio and non  
audio listings.  
Radio(s)  
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,  
do the following while the vehicle is parked:  
Become familiar with the operation and controls of  
the audio system.  
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset  
radio stations.  
For more information, see Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2.  
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding  
any equipment.  
Adding audio or communication equipment could  
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,  
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.  
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and  
telephone equipment.  
Full View of Radio with CD shown,  
Radio with Six-Disc CD similar  
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).  
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after  
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) on page 2-34 for more information.  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB utilizes  
Gracenote® technology to provide Song, Artist, Album,  
and Genre information for many CD audio discs  
and is capable of playing DVD-A and DTS encoded  
discs, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio,  
Hard Drive Device (HDD), and USB  
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS)  
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations  
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon  
receiving specific information from these stations and  
only works when the information is available. While the  
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name  
or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can  
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio  
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the  
radio station.  
The vehicle may have one of these radios as its audio  
system.  
If the vehicle does not have one of these radio  
systems, it may have a navigation radio system.  
See the Navigation System manual for more information  
on the navigation audio system.  
If the vehicle has one of these radios, it has either a  
Bose® sound system or a Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®  
sound system. See “Digital Signal Processing (DSP)”  
later in this section for more information on the  
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound system.  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Noise Compensation Technology: If the vehicle has  
the Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB, it includes  
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.  
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts  
the audio system equalization, to compensate for  
background noise.  
Playing the Radio  
VOL P (Volume/Power): The power knob is part of the  
VOL knob and is located above the radio, at the left side  
of the clock. Press to turn the system on and off.  
Turn the VOL knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume  
settings where background noise can affect how well  
you hear the music being played through the vehicle’s  
audio system. At higher volume settings, where the  
music is much louder than the background noise,  
there might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.  
For additional information on AudioPilot®, visit  
bose.com/audiopilot.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): A Radio with  
SCV automatically adjusts the sound to compensate  
for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up  
or slows down, so that the volume is consistent while  
driving. That way, the volume level should sound about  
the same while driving. To activate SCV:  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
To activate AudioPilot®:  
2. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL  
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.  
2. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL label  
on the radio display.  
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed  
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,  
or High) to select the level of radio volume  
compensation. The display times out after  
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting  
allows for more radio volume compensation at  
faster vehicle speeds.  
3. Press either the On or Off label located under the  
AUTO VOL display to turn this feature on or off.  
The display times out after approximately  
10 seconds.  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For XM™ stations, the music guide displays a Category  
list. This list displays all of the Categories available and  
the number of XM stations available under each.  
Finding a Station  
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select different radio stations  
within a selected band.  
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to scroll through the list. Press this  
knob to select the desired item. The selected item  
displays a speaker symbol to indicate it is the current  
active source.  
FM/AM: Press to switch between FM and AM radio  
bands.  
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the previous or to the next  
radio station and stay there.  
Finding a XM™ Station  
The radio only tunes into stations with a strong signal  
that are in the selected band.  
m : Press to switch to XM mode. Turn the TUNE/TONE  
knob to select from a list of available XM stations.  
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob until the desired station  
is highlighted. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to select  
the highlighted station. The highlighted station will also  
automatically be selected if the TUNE/TONE is released  
and no longer turned.  
INFO (Information) (FM-RDS, XM™ Satellite Radio  
Service, CD-Text, CD Gracenote Database, HDD,  
MP3/WMA, and iPod): Press to display additional text  
information related to the currently playing content.  
When information is not available, No Information  
displays.  
MENU/SELECT: For FM/AM stations, the MENU/  
SELECT displays a list of available radio stations.  
Under this menu, there is a refresh list selection that  
allows the user to update the list for all available stations  
that the radio is able to receive at the current location.  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the  
CONFIG button. To setup the number of favorites  
pages, perform the following steps:  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite  
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering  
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See  
Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV label.  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages  
by pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be  
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons  
positioned below the radio station frequency labels on  
the display and by using the radio favorites page button  
(FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to  
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations  
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain  
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,  
to return to the original main radio screen showing  
the radio station frequency labels and to begin  
the process of programming favorites for the  
chosen number of pages.  
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following  
steps:  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the  
station is to be stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a  
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and  
released, the radio recalls the station that was set.  
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station  
to be stored as a favorite.  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Tone  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,  
press the TUNE/TONE knob until the speaker control  
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired  
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the  
desired label. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob clockwise  
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.  
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):  
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the  
TUNE/TONE knob until the tone control labels display.  
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press  
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn  
the TUNE/TONE knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting  
can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,  
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV buttons until  
the desired levels are obtained.  
\ FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are  
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or has static,  
decrease the treble.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,  
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE  
label for more than two seconds. A beep may sound and  
the level adjusts to the middle position.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.  
A beep may sound and the level adjusts to the middle  
position.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the  
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for more  
than two seconds.  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the  
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for more  
than two seconds.  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Centerpoint®: Select to enable Bose®  
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)  
Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® produces a full  
vehicle surround sound listening experience from  
CD, non-5.1 surround sound DVD-A, MP3/WMA,  
AUX (auxiliary) input, or XM digital audio source and  
will deliver five independent audio channels from  
conventional two channel stereo recording.  
If the radio has this feature, it is used to provide a  
choice of different listening experiences. To choose a  
DSP setting, perform the following steps:  
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to display the  
tone/speaker, and DSP labels.  
This feature is not available in AM/FM radio mode.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label.  
If the vehicle is equipped with the Bose® 5.1 Cabin  
Surround® sound system, the radio can support the  
playback of 5.1 Surround Sound DVD-A discs or DTS  
5.1 Surround Sound CD discs. When a 5.1 Surround  
Sound formatted disc is playing, DSP options  
available are:  
3. Press the Back button to exit the display.  
To return to the original display, repeatedly press  
the Back button or wait for the display to time out.  
The DSP settings available are:  
Normal: Select for normal mode, this provides the  
best sound quality for all seating positions.  
− 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best for all seating  
positions.  
Driver: Select to adjust the audio for the driver to  
− 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for the rear seating  
position.  
receive the best possible sound quality.  
Rear: Select to adjust the audio for the rear seat  
passengers to receive the best possible sound  
quality.  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Radio Functions  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the  
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.  
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming  
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in  
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you  
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio  
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service  
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more  
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call  
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or  
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.  
CONFIG: Press to display FAV, AUTO VOL, XM  
(if equipped), or HDD (if available), and Back. See the  
information provided in this radio section to learn more  
options about the FAV, AUTO VOL, XM, and HDD  
(if available) label functions. See “Speed Compensated  
Volume (SCV)” or “Noise Compensation Technology”  
earlier for information on the AUTO VOL label. Press the  
pushbutton located under the Back label to go back to the  
previous display.  
Radio Message  
Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK® system  
has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
Radio Messages for XM Only  
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-108 later in this  
section for further detail.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.  
Playing a CD (Single Disc Player)  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.  
The player pulls it in. The CD track number and a  
Shuffle label displays. The CD begins playback.  
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the  
Shuffle label to play the tracks of a CD in random order.  
Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio  
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,  
if it was the last selected audio source.  
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)  
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.  
This CD player holds up to six CDs.  
When a CD is inserted, the disc number displays on  
the upper right side of the screen and the track number  
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle  
and Disc labels appear below. Press the pushbuttons  
located under the Disc label to change to another disc.  
The CD begins playback of the first track on the selected  
disc. As each new track starts to play the track number  
displays in the left and center of the screen.  
To insert one CD:  
1. Press and release the load button.  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.  
A Shuffle label and the DISC icon displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located below the Shuffle  
label to play the tracks of a current disc in random  
order. Press the pushbutton again to turn Shuffle off.  
Shuffle Off displays.  
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the  
Shuffle label to play the tracks of the CD that is currently  
playing in random order. Press again to turn Shuffle  
off. Shuffle Off displays  
5. The CD resumes normal playback.  
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:  
Z (Eject): To eject the disc that is currently playing,  
press and release. Ejecting Disc displays and a beep  
sounds. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.  
The disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after  
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into  
the player and begins playing.  
1. Press and hold this button for five seconds.  
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert  
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.  
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading  
more CDs.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for  
two seconds to eject all discs.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of  
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.  
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either  
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player  
continues moving backward or forward through the  
tracks on the CD.  
Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc  
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB is capable of  
playing DVD audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin surround  
sound system.  
Insert the DVD audio disc into the CD/DVD-A player.  
DVD AUDIO displays and playback begins. The Group  
and track number displays during playback.  
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse  
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at  
a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track  
displays. Release to resume playing the track.  
This type of radio does not support the playback of DVD  
video discs. If you attempt to play a DVD video disc,  
the radio displays “Read Error Please Check Disc”  
and ejects the disc.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a  
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track  
displays. Release to resume playing the track.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to switch between  
CD/DVD-A, auxiliary input, and USB devices.  
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to reverse playback  
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced  
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed of 2X.  
Each successive press changes playback to a speed  
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is  
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future  
listening.  
of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume normal  
CD: Press to play a CD when listening to the radio.  
The disc and/or track number displays when a CD  
is in the player.  
playback. The elapsed time of the track displays.  
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast reverse does not  
function.  
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to automatically search for  
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio  
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,  
“No Aux Input Device Found” displays.  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding Songs on DVD Audio  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to advance playback  
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced  
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed  
of 2X. Each successive press changes playback to a  
TUNE/TONE: Turn this knob to display a list of all  
tracks in all groups on the DVD audio disc. Stop turning  
this knob or press the TUNE/TONE knob to start  
playback of a particular track.  
speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume normal  
playback. The elapsed time of the track displays.  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of  
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.  
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either  
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player  
continues moving backward or forward through the  
tracks within the current Group.  
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast forward does not  
function.  
Stopping DVD Audio Playback  
Press the pushbutton located under the c (stop) label  
to stop playback of the DVD audio disc. “DVD PreStop”  
displays. Press r / j to resume playback from where it  
was stopped.  
MENU/SELECT: To change Groups, press the  
pushbutton located under the Menu label to display  
a list of all Groups. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to  
highlight the desired Group. Press the MENU/SELECT  
knob to select it. Playback begins from track 1 of the  
selected Group.  
Press the pushbutton located under the c label again  
while in DVDPreStop, “DVDStop” displays. Press r / j  
while in DVDStop to begin playback from the beginning of  
the DVD audio disc.  
Shuffle on DVD Audio  
Press r / j during DVD audio playback to pause or  
Press the pushbutton located under the Shuffle label  
to begin random playback of all songs in the current  
Group. Press again to turn off random playback.  
resume playback.  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting DVD Audio Streams  
Care of Your CD and DVD-A Discs  
Each DVD audio Group may contain audio content  
that is encoded in one or two formats. For example,  
a particular Group may have both a 5.1 surround audio  
stream and a 2.0 stereo audio stream available.  
If playing a CD or DVD-A disc, the sound quality can  
be reduced due to disc quality, the method of recording,  
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the  
way the disc has been handled. Handle them carefully.  
Store disc(s) in their original cases or other protective  
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The  
CD/DVD-A player scans the bottom surface of the disc.  
If the surface of a disc is damaged, such as cracked,  
broken, or scratched, the disc may not play properly or  
not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a disc while  
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up discs  
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and  
the outer edge.  
Press the pushbutton located under the Audio label  
to display the current audio stream playing. “Audio  
Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly displays. Press the  
pushbutton located under the Audio label again to toggle  
between Audio Stream 1 or Audio Stream 2 (if available).  
Check the DSP settings to determine if a 5.1 surround  
sound Audio Stream is playing. See “Digital Signal  
Processing (DSP)” earlier in this section. Press the DSP  
label to see if the 5.1 + Normal or 5.1 + Rear settings  
are available for selection. If these settings are available,  
Audio Stream 1 is playing.  
If the surface of a disc is soiled, take a soft, lint free  
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral  
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.  
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center  
to the edge.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care of Your CD or DVD-A Player  
Disc Messages  
Do not add any label to a disc, it could get caught in the  
CD/DVD-A player. If a disc is recorded on a personal  
computer and a description label is needed, label the  
top of the recorded disc with a marking pen.  
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the disc  
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:  
The radio system does not support the playlist  
format, the compressed audio format, or the data file  
format.  
The use of disc lens cleaners for discs is not advised,  
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the disc  
optics with lubricants internal to the CD/DVD-A player  
mechanism.  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the disc should play.  
The road is very rough. When the road becomes  
smoother, the disc should play.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than  
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an  
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,  
the CD player could be damaged. While using the  
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without  
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the  
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign  
materials, liquids, and debris.  
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.  
There could have been a problem while burning  
the disc.  
If an error displays, see “Disc Messages” later in this  
section.  
The label could be caught in the CD/DVD-A player.  
If the disc is not playing correctly, for any other reason,  
try a known good disc.  
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and provide  
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.  
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing  
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. Radios with  
the DVD Audio feature, are capable of playing  
MP3/WMA on DVD+/-R discs. For more information,  
see Using an MP3 on page 3-104 later in this section.  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Recorded Song or Category  
Hard Drive Device (HDD)  
Radios with a hard drive device are able to record  
songs from Audio CDs, MP3/WMA discs, and USB  
mass storage devices. This type of radio has a  
40 GB (gigabyte) HDD. A portion of the HDD is used  
for the storage of radio system files. The remainder  
of the HDD capacity is available for the storage of  
media files.  
DEL (Delete): You must select a song from one of the  
song lists or you must be listening to a song to delete  
it. Once the song is selected, press the DEL hard key.  
To Delete an entire category, select a category and  
press DEL.  
Stopping the Recording  
Music or content that is stored on the hard drive device  
that you did not create, or have the right to distribute,  
must be deleted before the sale or end of the lease  
of the vehicle.  
While recording from the audio CD, press the REC  
button to display the stop recording option. Press the  
pushbutton located under this option to confirm the  
selection.  
Recording From Audio CDs  
Ejecting a CD or Turning Off The Vehicle  
While Recording  
REC (Record): While listening to an audio CD, press to  
start recording songs from the disc. The radio has the  
option to record the current song playing or all songs  
from the CD. Press the pushbutton located under  
the desired record option.  
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle is turned off before  
the recording process has completed, tracks that  
have been completely recorded are stored to the HDD.  
Incomplete tracks are discarded.  
A status bar appears on the top of the display when  
the recording process starts. The status bar disappears  
when the process has ended. The recorded songs  
are now available.  
Re-recording Audio CDs  
If a CD has already been recorded, the radio system  
will not record the contents again. If a partially recorded  
CD is selected for recording, only those songs which  
are not already on the HDD will be recorded.  
Copy Protected CD(s)  
Make sure the disc is not copy-protected. The radio  
does not copy a copy-protected CD to the HDD.  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
from the HDD. With a “MuliHit” song playing, press the  
button below the EDIT label to bring up the list of  
multiple names found in the Gracenote® Database.  
Use the Menu/Select knob to highlight and select the  
correct name for the “MultiHit” recorded CD.  
The Gracenote® Database stored on the HDD can be  
updated so that it includes name information for more  
recently released audio CDs. See your dealer/retailer for  
more information on Gracenote® Database updates for  
the HDD radio.  
Audio CD Song, Artist, Album and  
Genre Information  
Radios with HDD, contain a Gracenote® Database that  
the radio uses to determine the song, artist, album and  
genre information. The Gracenote® Database allows the  
radio to record an audio CD to the HDD and store the  
content using song, artist, album and genre information.  
Newly released audio CDs as well as some less  
common audio CDs may not be found in the Gracenote®  
Database stored on the HDD. If these audio CDs contain  
CD-text, the radio will use the CD-text information when  
recording the content to the HDD. If an audio CD is not  
found in the Gracenote® Database and it does not have  
CD-text information, the radio will record the audio CD  
with all song, artist, album and genre names as  
“NO INFO”.  
Gracenote® Database  
Gracenote Music Recognition Service, Music  
recognition technology, and related data are provided  
by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in  
music recognition technology and related content  
delivery. For more information, visit gracenote.com.  
Songs recorded with “NO INFO” to the HDD will be hard  
to sort, identify, and select. For better HDD navigation,  
CDs with “NO INFO” can first be converted to MP3 format  
with Tag information on a home computer and then  
recorded to the HDD from an MP3 disc or USB device.  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,  
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,  
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and  
service may practice one or more of the following U.S.  
Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,  
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending.  
Some services supplied under license from Open Globe,  
Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.  
Occasionally, the radio may find more than one match in  
Gracenote® Database for an audio CD that has been  
recorded. If this happens, the radio will display “MultiHit”  
for the name information when the songs are selected  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of  
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and  
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of  
Gracenote.  
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT  
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE  
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,  
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the  
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote  
Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions.  
If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and  
all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,  
and Gracenote Servers.  
If you require more information regarding the use of the  
Gracenote Service, visit: gracenote.com/corporate  
For the data provided by Gracenote® Music Recognition  
Service, the content is not necessarily guaranteed 100%.  
Regarding the use of Gracenote Music Recognition  
Service. When this product is used, it is necessary to  
agree to the following articles.  
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the  
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers,  
including all ownership rights.  
This application or device contains software from  
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).  
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable  
for any payment to you for any information that you  
provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its  
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its  
own name.  
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote  
Software”) enables this application to perform disc  
and/or file identification and obtain music-related  
information, including name, artist, track, and title  
information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or  
embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)  
and to perform other functions.  
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track  
queries for statistical purposes.  
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier  
is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries  
without knowing anything about who you are. For more  
information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy  
Policy for the Gracenote service.  
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the  
intended End-User functions of this application or device.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the  
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your  
own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to  
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software  
or any Gracenote Data to any third party.  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote  
Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes  
no representations or warranties, express or implied,  
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in  
the Gracenote Servers.  
Recording From MP3/WMA Discs  
or USB  
REC (Record): While listening to a MP3/WMA disc or  
a USB device (excluding iPod), press to start recording  
songs from the disc. The radio has the option to record  
the current song playing or all songs from the disc. Press  
the pushbutton located under the desired record option.  
Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the  
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for  
any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.  
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or  
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of  
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be  
uninterrupted.  
A status bar appears on the top of the display when the  
recording process starts. The status bar disappears  
when the process has ended. The recorded songs  
are now available.  
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new  
enhanced or additional data types or categories  
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is  
free to discontinue its services at any time.  
AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are not fully supported.  
These file types may or may not play and may be shown  
without Tag information. Without Tag information  
available, these file types may be identified only by  
filename.  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
Audiobooks from audible.com can also be transferred  
to the HDD using the record function. See Audiobooks  
later in this section for more information.  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS  
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE  
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE  
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR  
LOST REVENUES.  
USB Host Support  
The USB connector uses the USB standards, 1.1 and  
2.0. This type of connector supports rates for low  
speed (1.5 Mb/s), full speed (12 Mb/s), and high  
speed (480 Mb/s).  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Supported Devices  
USB Flash Drives  
Mode  
Song  
When Displayed  
System is playing back all songs  
in alphabetical order.  
System is playing back all songs  
from the selected playlist in the  
order they were added.  
Portable USB Hard Drives  
Playlist  
Playing From the Hard Drive Device  
AudioBook  
HDD Menu  
System is playing back audio  
book content.  
HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press the HDD button to  
start the HDD mode. HDD displays and playback  
resumes from where it was last stopped.  
HDD Playback Mode  
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to display the  
HDD Menu.  
This radio system displays the current hard drive  
playback mode. See the following table showing the  
display mode options and what happens as the mode  
is displayed:  
2. Turn this knob to highlight an option from the  
HDD Menu. The available options are:  
Shuffle Songs  
Playlist  
Mode  
When Displayed  
System is randomly playing back  
all HDD content.  
System is playing back content  
by a selected Artist in  
alphabetical order.  
System is playing back content  
from a selected album in track  
order.  
System is playing back content in  
a selected Genre in alphabetical  
order.  
Artists  
Shuffle  
Albums  
Artist  
Song Titles  
Genres  
Album  
Genre  
Recently Saved  
Audiobook  
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the  
desired option.  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Jump  
HDD Categories  
To scroll up or down the list of Artists, Albums, or Song  
Titles, press and hold the pushbutton located under  
the FWD or REV tab.  
The HDD category mode can be used to select a song  
by a particular artist, album, or genre for playback. As an  
example, the HDD Menu displays a layout such as:  
To jump to the beginning, middle, or last section of  
the list:  
— Artists (5)  
— Albums (6)  
— Song Titles (77)  
— Genres (3)  
Press the first pushbutton located under the display  
to go to the beginning section of the list.  
Press the second pushbutton located under the  
display to go to the middle section of the list.  
The radio system displays the number of available items  
in each individual category as shown on the sample  
display. For example, the sample display shows there  
is content on the hard drive from five individual artists.  
Press the third pushbutton located under the  
display to go to the last section of the list.  
Shuffle Songs  
Select the HDD Menu category to display the available  
items in each individual category, then select an item  
from one of these submenus to display a list of songs  
related to that menu item. Select a song to begin  
playback of that song and to put the HDD in the  
playback mode.  
Select this option from the HDD Menu to randomly play  
back HDD content.  
Playlist  
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display all  
six favorite Playlists, then select one of the six playlist  
to display a list of songs that have been added to that  
favorite playlist. Select a song from the list to begin  
playback of that song and to put the HDD into the  
Playlist mode. See “Saving HDD Favorites” later  
in this section for more information.  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recently Saved  
Saving HDD Favorites  
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display the last  
50 songs added since the vehicle was last turned on.  
The songs are categorized into songs recorded  
from CDs or USB devices.  
During HDD playback, press the FAV button to change  
between favorite modes. The following favorite modes  
are supported:  
Playlists  
Artists  
Audiblebook  
The radio is able to play back audio-book content  
downloaded from audible.com®. This content can be  
transferred into the HDD by either burning it to a CD or  
copying it to a USB storage device and then recording  
it to the HDD.  
The audible.com® playback requires activation of the  
vehicle as a player for downloaded content. The radio  
system activates the audible.com® system when  
information is found on either a CD inserted into  
the CD/DVD-A player or if a USB storage device is  
connected. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
number is a required in order to activate the vehicle.  
Albums  
Genres  
Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the  
pushbutton located under the favorites selection.  
Store favorites according to the following table:  
Favorites  
Display Mode  
Action on Press-and-Hold  
Adds currently playing track to  
the playlist selected.  
Saves the artist associated with  
the currently playing track in the  
indicated favorites position.  
Playlist  
Artist  
Saves the album associated with  
the currently playing track in the  
indicated favorites position.  
Saves the genre associated with  
the currently playing track in the  
indicated favorites position.  
Album  
Genre  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press and hold the REV or FWD buttons to rewind or  
fast forward through the time shift buffer. Hold FWD until  
the end of the currently recorded buffer to resume “live”  
radio playback. With “live” radio playing, the radio display  
will no longer show the buffer bar below the station  
number.  
Configuring HDD Favorites  
Press the CONFIG button to display the radio  
configuration options. Press the pushbutton under  
the HDD label to display the available favorite modes.  
Press the pushbutton under the favorite label to set  
the available favorite modes. Available favorite modes  
are highlighted.  
On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD button multiple  
times to rewind or fast forward. Each press will rewind  
or fast forward 30 seconds of content. On XM, press  
the REV or FWD button multiple time to jump to  
the previous or next song or commercial.  
Time-shifting — Pause and Rewind Live  
FM/AM and XM™ (if equipped)  
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB has  
the ability to rewind 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM  
(if equipped) content. While listening to the radio,  
the content from the current station is always being  
buffered to the HDD.  
When the radio station is changed, the buffer is cleared  
and automatically restarted for the current station.  
You cannot rewind to content from a previously  
tuned station.  
Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not available while  
recording or while other sources of playback are  
selected.  
Press r / j (play/pause) To pause the radio. The  
radio display will show the Time Shift buffer status bar.  
The status bar shows the amount of content that is  
stored in the buffer and the current pause point.  
Pausing AM/FM or XM™ (if equipped) with  
the Vehicle Turned Off  
To resume playback from the current pause point,  
press r / j again. The radio will no longer be playing  
“live” radio. Instead, time shifted content is being played  
from the buffer. When the radio is playing time shifted  
content from the buffer, a buffer status bar shows below  
the station number on the left side of screen.  
If AM/FM or XM is paused when the vehicle is turned  
off, the radio will continue to buffer the current radio  
station for up to one hour. If the vehicle is turned  
back on within one hour, the radio will automatically  
resume playback from the pause point.  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD  
when a portable audio device is playing. Press again to  
start playing audio from the connected portable audio  
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,  
“No Aux Device” displays.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack. It is in the  
center console bin. This is not an audio output; do not  
plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.  
An external audio device such as an iPod, laptop  
computer, MP3 player, etc. can be connected to the  
auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio  
listening.  
Using the Radio Controls to Connect  
and Control an iPod  
An iPod can be controlled by using the radio buttons  
and knobs; the song information shows on the radio’s  
display. To connect and control the iPod using the radio  
controls, the vehicle must have a USB port. If it does, it is  
located in the center console bin. You will also need the  
special iPod connection cable that came as standard  
equipment with the vehicle as part of the USB option.  
The special iPod connection cable can also be purchased  
or made available, from your dealer/retailer. See your  
dealer/retailer for more information.  
Set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is stopped.  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information  
on driver distraction.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.  
The radio automatically detects the device and “Aux Input  
Device” displays. The device begins playing over the  
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already been  
connected, press the radio’s AUX or CD/AUX button.  
This feature supports the following iPod models*:  
Fifth generation or later iPod  
First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano  
iPod touch  
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of  
the portable player. Use the portable device to make  
additional volume adjustments.  
iPod classic  
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a portable  
audio device is playing. The portable audio device  
continues playing, until it is stopped.  
* For proper operation, make sure the iPod has  
the latest firmware from Apple®. The iPod firmware  
can be updated using the latest iTunes application.  
See apple.com/itunes.  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To connect and control the iPod, connect one end  
of the special iPod connection cable to the iPod’s dock  
connector. Connect the other end to both the USB port  
and the auxiliary input jack. The USB port and the  
auxiliary input jack are located in the center console bin.  
If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works,  
a GM logo may appear on the iPod. The iPod’s music  
information will be shown on the radio’s display and the  
music begins playing through the vehicles audio system.  
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported or  
do not have the special iPod connection cable, you can  
still listen to the iPod in the vehicle by connecting it to the  
Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch)  
stereo cable. Command and control of the iPod via the  
radio buttons and knobs will not be supported when only  
using the Auxiliary Input Jack. See “Using the Auxiliary  
Input Jack” earlier for more information.  
Press the AM/FM, XM or HDD buttons to listen to one  
of these sources while an iPod is connected. If a disc  
is inserted, press the CD/AUX button to listen to a CD or  
DVD-A disc. Press the CD/AUX button again to start  
playing and controlling the connected iPod.  
A standard iPod USB cable, like the one that came with  
the iPod, cannot be used to connect an iPod to the  
vehicle. You must use the special iPod connection cable  
that came equipped with the vehicle or that was made  
available from your dealer/retailer in order for this  
feature to work.  
To properly dismount the iPod USB device before  
disconnecting from the vehicle, press the button directly  
under the EJECT label found on the iPod playback  
screen.  
Use the radio Menu/Select knob to bring up the iPod  
Menu and select Songs, Artists, Albums, Playlists  
and Audio books to play from the iPod.  
The iPod’s battery charges while it is connected to the  
vehicle and if the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY  
or ON/RUN. It can also be left connected to the vehicle  
after the vehicle is turned off. With the vehicle turned off,  
the iPod will automatically be powered off and will not  
charge or draw power from the vehicle’s battery.  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure the CD does not have more than a  
maximum of 50 folders and playlists, and 255 files to  
read and play.  
Using an MP3  
MP3/WMA Format  
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find  
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums  
using one folder for each album. Each folder  
or album should contain 18 songs or less.  
The Single CD and the Six-Disc CD Radio will play  
MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or  
CD-RW disc. The HDD Radio is similar and can also  
play MP3/WMA files recorded on DVD +/R discs or  
a USB storage device.  
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to  
8 subfolders deep, keep the total number of  
folders to a minimum to reduce the complexity  
and confusion during playback.  
The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit  
rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,  
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,  
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.  
Song title, artist name, and album can display when  
files are recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.  
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension  
(other file extensions may not work).  
Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist  
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a  
combination of a large number of files and folders,  
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to  
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,  
playlists, or sessions.  
Creating an MP3/WMA Disc  
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal  
computer:  
Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc.  
Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Adding  
music to an existing disc can cause the disc not  
to function.  
Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on  
one disc.  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playlists can be selected by using the previous and next  
Empty Directory or Folder  
folder buttons, the SEEK arrows, \ FWD, or s REV  
buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was  
recorded using no file folders can also be played. If a  
CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of  
50 folders and playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you  
access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items  
over the maximum are not accessible.  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in  
the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders  
and no compressed files directly beneath them,  
the player advances to the next folder in the file  
structure that contains compressed audio files.  
No Folder  
The HDD Radio can support more than 255 files on an  
MP3/WMA disc.  
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files  
are located under the root folder. The next and previous  
folder functions do not display on a CD that was  
recorded without folders or playlists. The radio displays  
F1 DISC for the root directory.  
The HDD Radio does not support playlists on a disc or  
USB storage device.  
Root Directory  
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed  
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the  
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons  
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root  
folder. The radio displays F1 DISC for the root directory.  
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a  
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,  
the directory displays as F1 DISC. All files contained  
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any  
root directory folders. Playlists (Px) are always accessed  
after root folders or files.  
The HDD Radio displays the root directory of an  
MP3/WMA disc as F1 MP3 and the root directory  
of a USB storage device as F1 USB.  
3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Track names longer than 32 characters are shortened.  
Parts of words on the last page of text and the  
extension of the filename is not displayed.  
Order of Play  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the  
following order:  
The HDD Radio will display file names with the  
extension.  
Play begins from the first track in the first folder  
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each  
folder. When the last track of the last folder has  
played, play continues from the first track of the  
first playlist.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using  
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software  
can be accessed, however they cannot be edited  
using the radio. These playlists are special folders  
containing compressed audio song files. Playlists  
must have a file extension of PLS or M3U.  
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the next  
and previous folder button.  
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and  
continues sequentially through all tracks in each  
playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has  
played, play continues from the first track of the  
first folder.  
Playlists can be selected using the previous and next  
folder buttons. Tracks can be changed by pressing  
the seek buttons or turning the tune knob. Songs are  
played sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD  
When play enters a new folder, the display does not  
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder  
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new  
track name displays.  
to reverse or advance through the playing song.  
The HDD Radio does not support preprogrammed  
playlists. To create a playlist on the HDD radio from  
songs recorded to the HDD, see “Saving HDD Favorites”  
earlier in this section.  
File System and Naming  
The song name displays the song name that is  
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not in the  
ID3 tag, the radio displays the file name without the  
extension.  
3-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing an MP3/WMA  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of  
the current MP3/WMA file, if more than five seconds have  
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA  
file. If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the  
player continues moving backward or forward through  
MP3/WMA files on the CD.  
Insert a CD partway into the slot (Single CD Player),  
or press the load button and wait for the message  
to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up.  
The player pulls in the CD and should begin playing.  
For the Single CD Player, the track number displays at  
the left and center of the screen. A Shuffle label appears  
below. Press the pushbutton located under the Shuffle  
label to play the MP3/WMA files of the CD in random  
order.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton under  
the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous  
folder.  
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton under the  
For the Six-Disc CD Player, the disc number displays  
at the upper right side of the screen. The track number  
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle,  
Disc, and Folder labels appear below. Press the  
pushbutton located under the Shuffle label to play the  
MP3/WMA files of the currently selected CD in random  
order. Press the pushbuttons located under the Disc or  
Folder labels to change to another disc or folder.  
Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback  
quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a  
reduced volume. The elapsed time of the file displays.  
Release to resume playing the file.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is  
heard at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of the  
file displays. Release to resume playing the file.  
As each new track starts to play, the track number and  
song title displays.  
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not  
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically  
pulls back into the player and begins playing.  
Shuffle: With the shuffle setting, MP3/WMA files on the  
CD can be played in random, rather than sequential  
order, on the CD currently playing. To use shuffle:  
To play MP3/WMA files from the CD in random  
order, press the pushbutton under the Shuffle  
label until Shuffle On displays. Press again to  
turn shuffle off.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button  
for two seconds to eject all discs.  
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD  
playing.  
3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this  
time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
XM Radio Messages  
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,  
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,  
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
No Title Info: No song title information is available  
at this time on this channel. The system is working  
properly.  
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is  
being updated, and no action is required. This process  
should take no longer than 30 seconds.  
No CAT Info: No category information is available at  
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
No Information: No text or informational messages are  
available at this time on this channel. The system is  
working properly.  
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but  
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™  
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,  
the signal should return.  
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for  
the selected category. The system is working properly.  
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and  
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.  
This message should disappear shortly.  
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle  
could have previously been in another vehicle.  
For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be  
swapped between vehicles. If this message is  
received after having the vehicle serviced, check  
with your dealer/retailer.  
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in  
service. Tune in to another channel.  
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be  
received with your XM Subscription package.  
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message  
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.  
This label is needed to activate the service.  
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is  
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this  
station was one of the presets, choose another station  
for that preset button.  
3-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to  
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult  
with your dealer/retailer.  
Voice Recognition  
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret  
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.  
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have  
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.  
The system may not recognize voice commands if  
there is too much background noise.  
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have  
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system  
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice  
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.  
Navigation/Radio System  
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural  
voice.  
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the  
separate Navigation System manual.  
Audio System  
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound  
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers  
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio system  
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.  
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later  
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level  
is used if the volume is turned down too low.  
Bluetooth®  
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth  
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and  
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the  
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.  
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.  
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not  
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more  
information on compatible phones.  
3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pairing Information:  
Bluetooth Controls  
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system.  
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to  
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio  
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-122 for more  
information.  
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is  
moving.  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links  
with the first available paired cell phone in the  
order the phone was paired.  
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,  
to confirm system information, and to start speech  
recognition.  
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the  
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.  
c ª(Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a  
call, or to cancel an operation.  
Pairing should only need to be completed once,  
unless changes to the pairing information have  
been made or the phone is deleted.  
Pairing  
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the  
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to  
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before  
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not  
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free  
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for  
more information.  
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a  
Different Phone later in this section.  
3-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use  
a name that best describes the phone. This name  
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.  
The system then confirms the name provided.  
Pairing a Phone  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system,  
the system responds with “Ready” followed  
by a tone.  
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has  
been successfully paired” after the pairing process  
is complete.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
system responds with a tone. After the tone  
say “Hands Free”. The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to  
be paired.  
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions  
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will  
be used in Step 4.  
For vehicles without a navigation system,  
the system responds with “Ready” followed  
by a tone.  
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will  
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for information on  
this process.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
system responds with a tone. After the tone  
say “Hands Free”. The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the  
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions  
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number  
that was provided in Step 3.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth  
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the  
system will say “Is connected” after the connected  
phone.  
3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Paired Phone  
Linking to a Different Phone  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system,  
the system responds with “Ready” followed  
by a tone.  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
system responds with a tone. After the tone  
say “Hands Free”. The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with  
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.  
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to  
delete followed by a tone.  
If another phone is found, the response will be  
“<Phone name> is now connected”.  
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the  
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command  
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds  
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?  
Yes or No” followed by a tone  
If another phone is not found, the original phone  
remains connected.  
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system  
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.  
3-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at  
once with no pauses.  
Storing Name Tags  
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as  
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and  
OnStar systems.  
If the system recognizes the number it responds  
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone  
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the  
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the  
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
number to be re-entered.  
The system uses the following commands to store and  
retrieve phone numbers:  
Store  
Digit Store  
Directory  
4. After the system stores the phone number, it  
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
Using the Store Command  
The store command allows a phone number to be  
stored without entering the digits individually.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system,  
the system responds with “Ready” followed  
by a tone.  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
system responds with a tone. After the tone  
say “Hands Free”. The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with  
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.  
3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. After the complete number has been entered, say  
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the  
name tag” followed by a tone.  
Using the Digit Store Command  
The digit store command allows a phone number to be  
stored by entering the digits individually.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with  
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by  
a tone.  
Using the Directory Command  
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored  
by the system. To use the directory command:  
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will  
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.  
Continue entering digits until the number to be  
stored is complete.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the  
system will repeat them.  
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with  
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored  
name tags. When the list is complete, the system  
returns to the main menu.  
3-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system  
responds with “Would you like to delete,  
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.  
Deleting Name Tags  
The system uses the following commands to delete  
name tags:  
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete  
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,  
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”  
Delete  
Delete all name tags  
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system  
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say  
the name tag.”  
Using the Delete Command  
The delete command allows specific name tags to be  
deleted.  
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command  
To use the delete command:  
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored  
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar  
(if present).  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
To use the delete all name tags command:  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,  
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.  
3-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds  
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored  
in your phone directory and your route destination  
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please  
say yes or no.”  
Using the Dial Command  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the  
main menu.  
Making a Call  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using  
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.  
Calls can be made using the following commands:  
3. Say the entire number without pausing.  
Dial  
If the system recognizes the number, it responds  
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
Digit Dial  
Call  
If the system does not recognize the number,  
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.  
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the  
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.  
The system will ask for the number to be  
re-entered.  
Re-dial  
3-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Digit Dial Command  
Using the Call Command  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit  
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit  
to dial” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using  
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following  
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it  
heard followed by a tone.  
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and  
dials the number.  
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be  
dialed is complete. After the whole number has  
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds  
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right  
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by  
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The  
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”  
and dials the number. If the name tag is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
name tag to be re-entered.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the  
system will repeat them.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
3-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Re-dial Command  
Call Waiting  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone  
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Press b g to answer an incoming call when  
another call is active. The original call is placed  
on hold.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
Press b g again to return to the original call.  
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the  
original call with no action.  
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds  
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the  
last number called from the connected Bluetooth  
phone.  
Press c ª to disconnect the current call and  
switch to the call on hold.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
Three-Way Calling  
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth  
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier  
to work.  
Receiving a Call  
When an incoming call is received, the audio system  
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.  
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.  
Press c ª to ignore a call.  
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with  
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.  
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of  
the third party to be called.  
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all  
the callers together.  
3-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone  
Ending a Call  
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:  
Press c ªto end a call.  
Muting a Call  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be  
muted so that the person on the other end of the  
call cannot hear them.  
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with  
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from  
the vehicle to the cell phone.  
To Mute a call  
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle  
Bluetooth System  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with  
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.  
The connection process can take up to two minutes  
after the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN or  
ACC/ACCESSORY position.  
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with  
“Call muted”.  
To Cancel Mute  
1. During a call with the audio on the cell phone,  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
press and hold b g for two seconds:  
followed by a tone.  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the call  
transfers to the Bluetooth system.  
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system  
responds with “Resuming call”.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
system responds with a tone. After the tone say  
“Hands Free”. The call then transfers to the  
Bluetooth system.  
Transferring a Call  
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.  
3-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice Pass-Thru  
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)  
Tones  
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition  
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone  
supports this feature. This feature can be used to  
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers  
and numbers stored as name tags during a call.  
This is used when calling a menu driven phone  
system. Account numbers can be programmed into  
the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:  
For vehicles without a navigation system, the  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Sending a number during a call  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the system  
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands  
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a  
number to send tones” followed by a tone.  
3. Say the number to send.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
If the system clearly recognizes the number it  
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the  
dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with  
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.  
If the system is not sure it recognized the  
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,  
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.  
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will  
go through its cycle according to the phone’s  
operating instructions.  
3-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call  
Other Information  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by  
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks  
by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks  
and trade names are those of their respective owners.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with  
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Say the name tag to send.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
If the system is not sure it recognized the  
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,  
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.  
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Clearing the System  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.  
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook  
and phone pairing information. For information on how  
to delete this information, see the above sections  
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the  
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate  
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.  
3-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press to interact with the Bluetooth® system. See  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
Bluetooth® on page 3-109 for more information.  
+ e e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease  
the volume.  
b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/Push to Talk): Press  
and release to silence the vehicle speakers only. The  
audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if the  
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and  
release b g again, to turn the sound on.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, press  
and hold g for two seconds to initiate speech  
recognition. See “Speech Recognition” in the  
Navigation System manual for more information.  
Left-Side Steering  
Wheel Controls for CTS  
(CTS-V Similar)  
Right-Side Steering  
Wheel Controls for CTS  
and CTS-V  
For vehicles without a navigation system, press and  
Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ  
depending on the vehicle’s options. Some audio controls  
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the  
following:  
hold g for two seconds to interact with OnStar® or  
Bluetooth. See the OnStar® System on page 2-57,  
or Bluetooth® on page 3-109 for more information  
about these features.  
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the  
radio AM, FM, XM, CD, HDD, auxiliary input jack,  
USB and iPod.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, Onstar,  
or Bluetooth, press and hold g for two seconds  
and say “hands free” to interact with OnStar  
or Bluetooth. See the OnStar® System on  
page 2-57, or Bluetooth® on page 3-109 for  
more information about these features.  
y / c z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the  
previous or next radio station stored as a favorite,  
or the previous or next track of a CD.  
3-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
Radio Reception  
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception  
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,  
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can  
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to  
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under  
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause  
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.  
Frequency interference and static can occur during  
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone  
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external  
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory  
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug  
the item from the accessory power outlet.  
AM  
Cellular Phone Usage  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,  
especially at night. The longer range can cause station  
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio  
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels  
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the  
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and  
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this  
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.  
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the  
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making  
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,  
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes  
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.  
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug  
the cellular phone and turn it off.  
FM Stereo  
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles  
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic  
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,  
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings  
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.  
3-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting  
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting  
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  
radio reception. Any damage caused to your  
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials  
will not be covered by your warranty.  
Backglass Antenna  
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window  
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that  
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched  
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the  
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio  
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna  
connector needs to be properly attached to the post  
on the glass.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna  
System  
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to  
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM  
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space  
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone  
antenna without interfering with radio reception.  
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of  
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for  
clear radio reception.  
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the  
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.  
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to  
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear  
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.  
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp  
objects.  
3-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Defensive Driving  
Your Driving, the Road, and  
the Vehicle  
Defensive driving means “always expect the  
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively  
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They  
Are for Everyone on page 1-14.  
Driving for Better Fuel Economy  
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some  
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.  
{ CAUTION:  
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.  
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.  
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.  
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,  
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be  
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what  
they might do and be ready. In addition:  
Allow enough following distance between you  
and the driver in front of you.  
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,  
use cruise control, if equipped.  
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more  
slowly when conditions require.  
Focus on the task of driving.  
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.  
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in  
injury or possible death. These simple defensive  
driving techniques could save your life.  
Combine several trips into a single trip.  
Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec  
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.  
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every  
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,  
psychological, and developmental reasons for  
these laws.  
Drunk Driving  
{ CAUTION:  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol  
and then drive.  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your  
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment  
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.  
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision  
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or  
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home  
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a  
driver who will not drink.  
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s  
system can make crash injuries worse, especially  
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means  
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver  
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance  
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than  
if the person had not been drinking.  
Control of a Vehicle  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a global tragedy.  
The following three systems help to control the  
vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.  
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask  
more of those control systems than the tires and road can  
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a  
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and  
attentiveness.  
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual  
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with  
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-4.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a  
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between  
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a  
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and  
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of  
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and  
longer brake life.  
Braking  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.  
Braking action involves perception time and reaction  
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception  
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a  
second. But that is only an average. It might be less  
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or  
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,  
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,  
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a  
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels  
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an  
emergency, so keeping enough space between  
the vehicle and others is important.  
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being  
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.  
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder  
to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be  
some power brake assist but it will be used when the  
brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up,  
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will  
be harder to push.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or  
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,  
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight  
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-4.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as  
required, faster than any driver could. This can help  
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an  
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a  
braking skid.  
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps  
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls  
braking pressure accordingly.  
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to  
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor  
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going  
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal  
moves a little. This is normal.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed  
to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in  
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the  
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always  
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.  
If there is a problem with  
ABS, this warning light  
stays on. See Antilock  
Using ABS  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump  
or motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal  
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.  
page 3-39.  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.  
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam  
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what  
happens with ABS:  
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If  
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer  
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Braking in Emergencies  
StabiliTrak® System  
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same  
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than  
even the very best braking.  
The vehicle has an electronic stability control system  
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled  
system that assists with directional control of the  
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.  
Brake Assist (Except CTS-V)  
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a  
discrepancy between your intended path and the  
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak  
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the  
vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction  
which you are steering.  
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed  
to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle  
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature  
uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module  
to supplement the power brake system under conditions  
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the  
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down  
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control  
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the  
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal  
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal  
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal  
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature  
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is  
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.  
When the system activates, the Traction Control  
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument  
panel cluster flashes. You may also hear a noise or feel  
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to  
steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go.  
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a  
Service Stability System message displays on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) and the TCS/StabiliTrak  
warning light on the instrument panel cluster comes on.  
When this message and warning light displays, the  
system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted  
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
on page 3-30 for more information.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle  
is started. The system should be left on to help assist with  
directional control of the vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to  
be turned off, press the TC (traction control) on/off button.  
The TCS/StabiliTrak® warning light will flash when the  
traction control system is limiting wheel spin.  
The TCS/StabiliTrak  
warning light comes on if  
there is a problem with  
the traction control system.  
If cruise control is being used when the StabiliTrak  
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.  
When road conditions allow, reengage the cruise  
control. See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more  
information.  
See StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System (TCS)  
Warning Light on page 3-40 and StabiliTrak® System  
on page 4-6. When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light  
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust  
your driving accordingly.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS)  
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery  
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the  
system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear  
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an  
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if  
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning  
to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes  
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to  
limit wheel spin.  
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is  
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road  
conditions, the system should always be left on, but it  
may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is  
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is  
required. Also, turn TCS off while in deep snow or on  
loose gravel, to assist vehicle motion at lower speeds.  
more information. See also Winter Driving on page 4-18  
for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy  
conditions.  
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,  
but this is normal.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the system off,  
press the TCS/StabiliTrak  
button located on the  
instrument panel (CTS)  
or the steering  
Competitive Driving Mode  
To select this optional handling mode, press the  
TCS/StabiliTrak button quickly two times and the  
STABILITRAK COMPETITVE MODE displays in the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). While in the StabiliTrak  
Competitive Mode, TCS does not limit wheel spin, and  
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes on. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
wheel (CTS-V).  
Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button  
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button again, or turn the  
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the vehicle, to  
turn TCS back on and turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning  
light off.  
and the traction control system will turn off and the  
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will come on. Press the  
button again to turn the system back on. For information  
on turning StabiliTrak off and on, see StabiliTrak System  
previously.  
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or  
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to  
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive  
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible  
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt  
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.  
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not  
covered. See the warranty book for additional  
information.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-4 for more information.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press and release this  
button, located in the  
center of the instrument  
panel, to change modes.  
Magnetic Ride Control™  
With this feature on the CTS-V, the Magnetic Ride  
Control system adjusts the ride of the vehicle to Touring  
or Sport modes. Magnetic Ride Control monitors the  
suspension system to determine the proper system  
response.  
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.  
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.  
Limited-Slip Rear Axle  
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal  
preference demand more control. This setting provides  
more “feel”, or response to road conditions.  
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more  
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works  
like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction  
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the  
most traction to move the vehicle.  
The setting can be changed at any time. Based on road  
conditions, steering wheel angle and the vehicle speed,  
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best  
handling while providing a smooth ride. The Touring and  
Sport modes will feel similar on a smooth road. Select a  
new setting whenever driving conditions change.  
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System  
With this feature, the AWD system will automatically  
monitor and adjust engine power to the front and rear  
wheels for the best traction and handling. If there is a loss  
of traction or stability, the AWD system works with the  
electronic stability control system to increase power to  
the front wheels as necessary.  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) briefly displays  
SUSPENSION MODE TOURING or SUSPENSION  
MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or when a new mode  
is selected.  
If the spare tire is on the vehicle, there may be a slight  
reduction in performance of the AWD system.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for  
AWD related DIC messages.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steering Tips  
Steering  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
Power Steering  
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires  
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is  
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is  
the one factor that can be controlled.  
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops  
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be  
steered but it will take more effort.  
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering  
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.  
Speed Variable Assist Steering  
The vehicle has a steering system that varies the  
amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in relation  
to the speed of the vehicle.  
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to  
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate  
gently into the straightaway.  
The amount of steering effort required is less at slower  
speeds to make the vehicle more maneuverable and  
easier to park. At faster speeds, the steering effort  
increases to provide a sport-like feel to the steering.  
This provides maximum control and stability.  
If the vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when  
parking or driving slowly, there may be a problem  
with the system. You will still have power steering,  
but steering will be stiffer than normal at slow speeds.  
See your dealer/retailer for service.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective  
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find  
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out  
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked  
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems  
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.  
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is  
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering  
around the problem.  
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.  
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a  
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or  
right depending on the space available.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and  
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the  
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned  
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either  
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as  
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the  
object.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  
at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a  
road onto the shoulder while driving.  
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be  
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:  
Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads  
for situations that might affect a successful pass.  
If in doubt, wait.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and  
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.  
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your  
side of the lane.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.  
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.  
When you are being passed, ease to the right.  
Loss of Control  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer  
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.  
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about  
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the  
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go  
straight down the roadway.  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction  
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has  
asked.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer  
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less  
danger.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,  
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,  
slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions.  
It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because  
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more  
limited.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving  
those conditions. But skids are always possible.  
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are  
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much  
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose  
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much  
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,  
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,  
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting  
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the  
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery  
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning  
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on  
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down  
when you have any doubt.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only  
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is  
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing  
your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,  
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for  
a second skid if it occurs.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Competitive Driving  
Driving at Night  
Competitive driving may affect the vehicle warranty.  
See the warranty book before using the vehicle  
for competitive driving.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving  
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by  
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by  
fatigue.  
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive  
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would  
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the  
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during  
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the  
upper mark that shows the proper operating range  
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how  
to add oil, see Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
Night driving tips include:  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside  
rearview mirror.  
Slow down and keep more space between you and  
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up  
so much road ahead.  
CTS-V Only: For competitive driving, it is recommended  
that the brake fluid be replaced with a high performance  
brake fluid that has a dry boiling point greater than 534°F  
(279°C). After conversion to the high performance brake  
fluid, follow the brake fluid service recommendations  
outlined by the fluid manufacturer. Do not use silicone  
or DOT-5 brake fluids.  
Watch for animals.  
When tired, pull off the road.  
Do not wear sunglasses.  
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.  
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle  
clean — inside and out.  
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or  
curves.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But, as we get older, these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much  
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.  
Driving through flowing water could cause your  
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you  
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not  
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about  
trying to drive through flowing water.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and  
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive  
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid  
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or  
flowing water.  
Hydroplaning  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under  
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.  
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are  
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,  
it has little or no contact with the road.  
{ CAUTION:  
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not  
work as well in a quick stop and could cause  
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the  
vehicle.  
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.  
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.  
After driving through a large puddle of water or a  
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until  
the brakes work normally.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?  
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?  
Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips  
include:  
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to  
recommended pressure?  
Allow extra following distance.  
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have  
Pass with caution.  
up-to-date maps?  
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.  
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.  
Highway Hypnosis  
Have good tires with proper tread depth.  
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings  
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a  
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.  
See Tires on page 5-63.  
Turn off cruise control.  
Other driving tips include:  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.  
Keep interior temperature cool.  
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having  
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.  
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead  
and to the sides.  
Things to check on your own include:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows  
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments  
often.  
clean — inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: In good shape?  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hill and Mountain Roads  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different  
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving  
in these conditions include:  
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition  
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the  
work of slowing down and they could get so hot  
that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Always have the engine running  
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.  
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.  
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling  
system, and transmission.  
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a  
lower gear.  
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut  
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds  
that let you stay in your own lane.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so  
hot that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine  
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.  
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your  
lane (stalled car, accident).  
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks  
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or  
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,  
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road  
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off  
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle  
motion at lower speeds.  
Winter Driving  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between  
the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip.  
Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing  
rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction.  
Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads  
can be treated with salt or sand.  
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves  
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but  
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.  
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road  
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on  
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface  
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the  
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering  
maneuvers and braking while on ice.  
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate  
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly  
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under  
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.  
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too  
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface  
under the tires even more.  
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Blizzard Conditions  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.  
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.  
If possible, use the Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:  
Check again from time to time to be sure  
snow does not collect there.  
Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on  
the side of the vehicle that is away from the  
wind to bring in fresh air.  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and  
set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
See Climate Control System in the Index.  
{ CAUTION:  
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.  
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.  
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause  
unconsciousness and even death.  
For more information about carbon monoxide, see  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-51.  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.  
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas  
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.  
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not  
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from  
around the base of your vehicle, especially any  
that is blocking the exhaust.  
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:  
Clear away snow from around the base of  
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking  
the exhaust pipe.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to  
keep warm, but be careful.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as  
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off  
and close the window most of the way to save heat.  
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really  
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm  
also helps.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,  
they can explode, and you or others could be  
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an  
engine compartment fire or other damage.  
Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid  
going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the  
speedometer.  
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then  
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal  
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.  
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle  
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as  
little as possible to save fuel.  
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,  
see Tire Chains on page 5-88.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the  
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.  
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help  
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction  
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction  
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off  
and use the rocking method.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading the Vehicle  
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area  
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability  
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a  
forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between  
1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the  
wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission  
wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting  
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting,  
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the  
transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in  
the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking  
motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the  
vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out.  
If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing  
Your Vehicle on page 4-26.  
It is very important to know how much weight  
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the  
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of  
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed  
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much  
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading  
Information label, and the Certification label.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of the vehicle.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows  
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation see  
on page 5-72.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on the  
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see  
“Certification Label” later in this section.  
Steps for Determining Correct  
Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
Example Label  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading  
Information label is attached to the vehicle’s  
center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,  
you will find the label attached below the door lock  
post (striker). The Tire and Loading Information  
label shows the number of occupant seating  
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity  
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
Example 1  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
Item  
Description  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 1 =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
See Towing a Trailer (CTS-V) on page 4-29  
or Towing a Trailer (CTS) on page 4-29  
for important information on towing a trailer,  
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.  
Subtract  
B
C
Occupant Weight  
300 lbs (136 kg)  
700 lbs (317 kg)  
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =  
Available Occupant  
and Cargo Weight =  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 2  
Example 3  
Item  
Description  
Total  
Item  
Description  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 2 =  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 3 =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
A
Subtract  
Subtract  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
B
C
Occupant Weight  
750 lbs (340 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
B
C
Occupant Weight  
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
0 lbs (0 kg)  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading  
Information label for specific information about  
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating  
positions. The combined weight of the driver,  
passengers, and cargo should never exceed  
your vehicle’s capacity weight.  
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,  
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).  
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,  
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification  
label also shows the maximum weights for  
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR  
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.  
Certification Label  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of the vehicle.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to  
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center  
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,  
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go  
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop  
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will  
keep going.  
Towing  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service if the disabled vehicle needs to be towed.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
{ CAUTION:  
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for  
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),  
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.  
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike  
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,  
or in a crash.  
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.  
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you  
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some  
of them are above the tops of the seats.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle  
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.  
The two most common types of recreational vehicle  
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing the vehicle  
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”  
(towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground  
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).  
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint  
in the vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
Do not leave a seat folded down unless  
you need to.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are some important things to consider before  
recreational vehicle towing:  
Dinghy Towing  
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels  
on the ground, the drivetrain components could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by  
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with  
all four wheels on the ground.  
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?  
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some  
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how  
long they can tow.  
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all  
four wheels on the ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle  
must be towed, a dolly or a trailer should be used. If an  
all-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed, a trailer should be  
used. See “Dolly Towing” following for more information.  
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?  
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for  
additional advice and equipment recommendations.  
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing  
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is  
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long  
Trip on page 4-16.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on  
page 2-44.  
Dolly Towing  
(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)  
4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic  
transmission or in 1 (First) for a manual  
transmission.  
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to  
the dolly.  
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position with a clamping device designed for towing.  
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.  
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)  
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all  
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two  
of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain  
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle  
with any of its wheels on the ground.  
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be towed with all  
four wheels on a trailer.  
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a  
rear-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:  
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the  
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.  
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  
proper trailer towing equipment.  
Towing a Trailer (CTS-V)  
The CTS-V is neither designed nor intended to tow  
a trailer.  
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read  
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears  
later in this section.  
Towing a Trailer (CTS)  
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by  
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,  
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe  
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used  
properly.  
{ CAUTION:  
The following information has many time-tested,  
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of  
these are important for your safety and that of your  
passengers. So please read this section carefully  
before pulling a trailer.  
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if  
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is  
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too  
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at  
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously  
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the  
resulting repairs would not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in  
this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/  
retailer for advice and information about towing a  
trailer with the vehicle.  
Load-pulling components such as the engine,  
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires  
are forced to work harder against the drag of the added  
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively  
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating  
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind  
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Three important considerations have to do with weight:  
The weight of the trailer.  
Pulling A Trailer  
Here are some important points:  
The weight of the trailer tongue.  
There are many different laws, including speed limit  
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure  
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but  
also where you will be driving. A good source for  
this information can be state or provincial police.  
The total weight on the vehicle’s tires.  
Weight of the Trailer  
How heavy can a trailer safely be?  
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles  
(1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,  
axle or other parts could be damaged.  
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).  
But even that can be too heavy.  
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,  
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much  
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can  
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and  
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.  
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section  
for more information.  
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a  
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)  
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps  
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in  
at the heavier loads.  
Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in  
D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear  
if the transmission shifts too often under heavy  
loads and/or hilly conditions. For vehicles with a  
manual transmission, it is better not to use the  
highest gear.  
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the  
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required  
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional  
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle  
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.  
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.  
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed  
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to  
save wear on the vehicle’s parts.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or  
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.  
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for more  
information.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Weight of the Trailer Tongue  
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight  
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the  
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the  
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the  
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot  
of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the  
vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can  
carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle  
can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be  
added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying  
that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21  
for more information about the vehicle’s maximum load  
capacity.  
For a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)  
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded  
trailer weight (B).  
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the  
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.  
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving  
some items around in the trailer.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires  
Safety Chains  
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper  
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the  
Certification label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or  
the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.  
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the  
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the  
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road  
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about  
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer  
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s  
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not  
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough  
slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to  
drag on the ground.  
Hitches  
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.  
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads  
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.  
Trailer Brakes  
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended  
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other  
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted  
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.  
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read  
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so  
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.  
Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle  
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to  
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they  
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from  
the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-51. Sealing the holes will  
also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle.  
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not try to tap  
into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,  
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.  
Trailer Wiring Harness  
All of the electrical circuits required for the trailer lighting  
system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear lamp  
connector. This connector is located under the carpet on  
the rear corner of the trunk compartment.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving with a Trailer  
Passing  
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of  
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out  
for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of  
handling and braking with the added weight of the  
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you  
are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the  
vehicle is by itself.  
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.  
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much  
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to  
the lane.  
Backing Up  
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.  
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand  
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your  
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,  
have someone guide you.  
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and  
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,  
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has  
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving  
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to  
be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical  
connection at the same time.  
Making Turns  
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering  
could cause the trailer to come in contact with  
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid  
making very sharp turns while trailering.  
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the  
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  
are still working.  
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than  
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,  
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or  
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.  
Following Distance  
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as  
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.  
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy  
braking and sudden turns.  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer  
Driving On Grades  
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever  
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,  
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the  
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.  
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting  
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is  
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so  
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.  
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument  
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer  
are burned out. For this reason you may think other  
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not.  
It is important to check occasionally to be sure the  
trailer bulbs are still working.  
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the  
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce  
the possibility of the engine and the transmission  
overheating.  
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to  
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under  
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. For vehicles with  
a manual transmission, it is better not to use the  
highest gear.  
The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailer  
lighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lighting  
system, its bulb warning lights may not let the driver  
know if one of the lamps goes out. So, when the a trailer  
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check the vehicle  
and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all  
working. Once the trailer lamps are disconnected, the  
bulb warning lights can again let the driver know that  
one of the vehicle lamps is out.  
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,  
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower  
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is  
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on  
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to  
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while  
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic  
transmission in P (Park) or the manual transmission in  
N (Neutral) for a few minutes before turning the engine  
off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine  
Overheating on page 5-38.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer  
wheels.  
Parking on Hills  
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the  
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.  
{ CAUTION:  
4. Reapply the brake pedal. For vehicles with an  
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake  
and shift into P (Park). For vehicles with a manual  
transmission, apply the parking brake, place  
the transmission in 1 (First) and turn the ignition  
to OFF/LOCK.  
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer  
attached can be dangerous. If something goes  
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be  
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be  
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a  
flat surface.  
5. Release the brake pedal.  
If parking the rig on a hill:  
1. Press the brake pedal, but if the vehicle has an  
automatic transmission, do not shift into P (Park)  
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill  
or into traffic if facing uphill.  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Leaving After Parking on a Hill  
Maintenance When Trailer Towing  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:  
Start the engine  
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling  
a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or  
Index for more information. Things that are especially  
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission  
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system  
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect  
these before and during the trip.  
Shift into a gear  
Release the parking brake  
2. Let up on the brake pedal.  
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.  
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  
are tight.  
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the  
chocks.  
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during  
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating  
on page 5-38.  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to  
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and  
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,  
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,  
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,  
traction control, and stability control. Some of these  
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage  
not covered by the vehicle warranty.  
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.  
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and  
supported service people.  
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:  
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the  
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including  
control module modifications, are not covered under the  
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining  
warranty coverage for affected parts.  
GM Accessories are designed to complement and  
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM  
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine  
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer  
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that  
GM-trained and supported service technicians will  
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.  
Vehicle on page 1-70.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including  
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some  
component wear by-products contain and/or emit  
these chemicals.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be injured and the vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle  
without knowing enough about it.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts,  
and tools before attempting any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other  
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be  
easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are  
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could  
be hurt.  
California Perchlorate Materials  
Requirements  
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag  
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries  
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain  
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be  
necessary. For additional information, see  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper  
service manual. It tells you much more about how to  
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order  
the proper service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 7-17.  
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting  
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-69.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the  
mileage and the date of any service work performed.  
See Maintenance Record on page 6-18.  
Gasoline Octane  
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code V), use  
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating  
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you  
might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,  
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a  
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.  
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and  
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of  
the Vehicle  
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the  
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can  
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment  
to the outside of the vehicle.  
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use  
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating  
of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing,  
you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane  
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,  
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you  
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,  
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as  
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs  
service.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the  
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the  
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,  
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP  
TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
shows the code letter or number that identifies the  
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the  
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) on page 5-118.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has the 6.2L supercharged V8 engine  
(VIN Code P), use premium unleaded gasoline with  
a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For best  
California Fuel  
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions  
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that  
meet California specifications. See the underhood  
emission control label. If this fuel is not available  
in states adopting California emissions standards, the  
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal  
specifications, but emission control system performance  
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp  
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check  
test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42.  
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for  
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is  
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty.  
performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with a  
posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use  
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or  
higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any  
aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle  
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock  
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as  
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If you are  
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear  
heavy knocking, the engine needs service.  
Gasoline Specifications  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification  
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or  
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an  
Additives  
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl  
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend  
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See  
Additives on page 5-7 for additional information.  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that help prevent  
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing  
the emission control system to work properly. In most  
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum  
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental  
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors  
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences  
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline  
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent  
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System  
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine  
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors  
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is  
the only gasoline additive recommended by General  
Motors.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive  
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline  
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against  
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can  
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of  
the emission control system could be affected. The  
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,  
return to your dealer/retailer for service.  
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help  
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and  
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in  
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,  
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.  
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing  
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that  
were not designed for those fuels.  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard  
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not  
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs  
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by  
the vehicle warranty.  
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel  
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel  
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.  
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle  
warranty.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business in the  
country where you will be driving.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Filling the Tank  
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can  
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you  
and others, read and follow all the instructions on  
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are  
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or  
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.  
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away  
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended  
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law  
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while  
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel  
pump; never let children pump fuel.  
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel door on the  
passenger side. To open the fuel door, push the  
rearward center edge in and release and it will open.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap  
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something  
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray  
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more  
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and  
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the  
cap all the way.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the  
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished  
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel  
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See  
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-113.  
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.  
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released  
too soon, it will spring back to the right.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the  
hook on the fuel door.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it  
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic  
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or  
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate  
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on  
page 3-42.  
{ CAUTION:  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not  
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by  
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station  
attendant. Leave the area immediately.  
The Tighten Gas Cap message in the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) displays if the fuel cap is not properly  
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-57 for more information.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the  
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If  
you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This  
may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light  
and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system.  
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the  
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be  
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this  
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:  
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.  
An electric fan under the hood can start up and  
injure you even when the engine is not running.  
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or  
on any surface other than the ground.  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside  
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.  
Contact should be maintained until the filling  
is complete.  
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.  
Do not use a cellular phone while  
pumping fuel.  
{ CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,  
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other  
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could  
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things  
that will burn onto a hot engine.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
To open the hood:  
1. Pull the hood release  
lever with this symbol  
on it. It is located inside  
the vehicle on the  
lower left side of the  
instrument panel.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the  
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located  
under the front edge of the grille near the center.  
Push the release lever up and raise the hood.  
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are  
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
CTS  
When you open the hood on the 3.6 L engine (2.8 L engine similar), you will see the following:  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-42.  
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine  
Cover). See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-41.  
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
B. Underhood Fuse Block (CTS) on page 5-120 or  
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See Engine Oil on  
page 5-18.  
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-48.  
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not Shown).  
See “When to Check and What to Use” under  
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-29.  
D. Remote Negative (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting  
on page 5-48.  
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir (Out of View).  
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger  
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.  
See Brakes on page 5-44.  
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.  
F. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on  
page 5-30.  
See Cooling System on page 5-30.  
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-25.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CTS-V  
When you open the hood on the 6.2L Super Charged engine, you will see the following:  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-42.  
H. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See Cooling  
System on page 5-30.  
I. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on  
page 5-30.  
B. Underhood Fuse Block (CTS) on page 5-120 or  
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not Shown).  
See “When to Check and What to Use” under  
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-29.  
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-48.  
D. Remote Negative (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting  
on page 5-48.  
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes on  
page 5-44.  
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to  
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.  
Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
See Cooling System on page 5-30.  
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under  
M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine  
Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
Cover). See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-41.  
G. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger  
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.  
N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-25.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Engine Oil  
Engine Oil  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each  
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must  
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
There is an oil pressure  
light in the instrument  
cluster and an Oil Pressure  
Low Stop Engine message  
on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC).  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See  
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for  
the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes  
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the  
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.  
If the light and/or message appear, check the engine  
oil level right away. For more information, see “Oil  
Pressure Low Stop Engine” under DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-57 and Oil Pressure Light on  
page 3-45. Check the engine oil level regularly; this is  
an added reminder.  
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel  
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it  
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview on page 5-14 for  
the location of the engine  
oil fill cap.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
If the oil level is within the cross-hatched area at the  
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the  
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of  
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see  
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper  
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in  
when through.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has  
so much oil that the oil level gets above the proper  
operating range and into the upper cross-hatched  
area on the dipstick, the engine could be damaged.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M  
Standard designation can cause engine damage not  
covered by the vehicle warranty.  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
Look for three things:  
SAE 5W-30  
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers  
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.  
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should have  
the starburst symbol on  
the container. This symbol  
indicates that the oil  
has been certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a  
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this  
vehicle.  
GM4718M  
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting  
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard  
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all  
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only  
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.  
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine  
oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not  
be available. You can add substitute oil designated  
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.  
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M  
should not be used for an oil change.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has been  
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.  
A Change Engine Oil Soon message comes on. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-57. Change the oil  
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).  
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the  
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is  
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and  
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this  
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has  
trained service people who will perform this work using  
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to  
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil  
Flushes  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils  
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are  
all that is needed for good performance and engine  
protection.  
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and  
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
Engine Oil Life System  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be  
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil  
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  
the oil is changed.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when  
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on  
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on  
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at  
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.  
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must  
be reset every time the oil is changed.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be  
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.  
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean  
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good  
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or  
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change  
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever  
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate  
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs  
where the oil is changed prior to a Change Engine Oil  
Soon message being turned on, reset the system.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the  
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it  
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into  
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a  
place that collects used oil.  
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil  
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine  
Oil Life System:  
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.  
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC  
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change  
to 100%.  
If the Change Engine Oil Soon message comes back on  
when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life System  
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove:  
Engine Cover  
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).  
Engine Cover (CTS)  
2. Raise the right front corner of engine cover (B) to  
release from the ball stud.  
3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward to slide the rear  
tabs (C) out from under the retainers.  
4. Lift and remove the engine cover.  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall engine  
cover.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove:  
Engine Cover (CTS-V)  
The engine cover consists of two pieces. Only the larger  
piece needs to be removed to access the engine oil  
and power steering fill caps.  
1. Raise the front of engine cover (A) to release from  
the ball studs (B).  
2. Pull the engine cover forward until clear of the  
smaller piece.  
3. Lift and remove the engine cover.  
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine  
cover.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:  
1. Turn the ignition off.  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine  
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle,  
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview  
on page 5-14 for more information on location.  
When to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each  
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you  
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter  
at each engine oil change.  
How to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
2. Remove the side cover by pulling up on the front of  
the cover.  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the  
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust  
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is  
required.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air box.  
6. Remove the three air cleaner housing cover  
screws.  
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp holding the air  
outlet duct in place. Do not remove the clamp.  
Move the duct aside.  
5. Remove the hose from the air cleaner housing  
mounting arm. Move the hose aside.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Pivot the air cleaner housing cover and remove the  
cover from the air cleaner housing.  
8. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner  
housing.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Reinstall Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
1. Install the air cleaner into the air cleaner housing.  
The outer air cleaner filter seal must be fitted  
properly in the air cleaner housing.  
{ CAUTION:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off  
can cause you or others to be burned. The air  
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop  
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and  
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not  
drive with it off, and be careful working on the  
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.  
2. Align the air cleaner housing cover tabs to the air  
cleaner housing.  
3. Install the air cleaner housing cover.  
4. Install the air cleaner housing cover screws.  
5. Install the hose to the air cleaner housing mounting  
arm. The hose must be routed correctly.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can  
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get  
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have  
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.  
6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct to the air cleaner  
housing.  
7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet duct screw clamp.  
8. Attach the electrical connector to the air box.  
9. Reinstall the side cover.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure  
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-14.  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
How to Check Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A  
transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a  
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer service  
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid  
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid  
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer  
for service. Have it repaired as soon as possible. You  
may also have the fluid level checked by your dealer/  
retailer when the oil is changed. See Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-14 for the proper fluid  
to use.  
There is a special procedure for checking and changing  
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is  
difficult, it should be done at the dealer/retailer service  
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional  
information or the procedure can be found in the service  
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service  
Hydraulic Clutch  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission  
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages  
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.  
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in  
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless  
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid  
will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could  
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and  
repaired.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When to Check and What to Use  
Cooling System  
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the  
correct working temperature.  
The hydraulic clutch fluid  
reservoir cap has this  
symbol on it. See Engine  
page 5-14 for reservoir  
location.  
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what  
you will see:  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper  
fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on  
page 6-14. The fluid requires changing every two years.  
How to Check and Add Fluid  
Visually check the clutch fluid reservoir to make sure  
the fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of  
the reservoir. The hydraulic clutch fluid system should  
be closed and sealed.  
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) (Out of View)  
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap  
Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to  
top-off the fluid level. Remove the cap only when  
necessary to add the proper fluid until the level reaches  
the MIN line.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could  
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)  
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in  
the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in the vehicle for all engines and  
the intercooler is filled with DEX-COOL®. This coolant is  
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or  
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.  
{ CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,  
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you  
can be burned.  
The following explains the cooling system and how to  
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a  
problem with engine overheating, see Engine  
Overheating on page 5-38.  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run  
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could  
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.  
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else  
needs to be added. This mixture:  
What to Use  
Gives freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C),  
{ CAUTION:  
outside temperature.  
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),  
engine temperature.  
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can  
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid  
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant  
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system  
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain  
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could  
get too hot but you would not get the overheat  
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or  
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of  
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
Protects against rust and corrosion.  
Will not damage aluminum parts.  
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,  
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.  
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze  
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and  
other parts.  
Check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank.  
If the coolant inside the surge tank is boiling, do not do  
anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but  
the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD  
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be  
sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. See  
Engine Coolant on page 5-31 for more information.  
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used  
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could  
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of  
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the  
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-14 for more information.  
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should be  
at or above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the side  
of the coolant surge tank. If the engine is cold, the  
coolant level should be near the FROID/FULL COLD  
line on the side of the coolant surge tank. If it is  
not, there could be a leak in the cooling system.  
Checking Coolant  
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking  
the coolant level.  
The engine coolant reservoir is located in the engine  
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. See  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are  
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank  
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out  
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the  
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure  
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge  
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn  
the pressure cap.  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.  
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill  
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could  
cause the engine to overheat and be severely  
damaged.  
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as  
follows:  
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when  
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank  
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer  
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise  
about one-quarter turn and then stop.  
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss  
means there is still some pressure left.  
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and  
remove it.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start  
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose  
is the top hose coming out of the radiator, on the  
passenger side of the vehicle. Watch out for the  
engine cooling fans.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add  
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank  
until the level reaches the FROID/FULL COLD  
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.  
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.  
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,  
to slightly above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the  
side of the coolant surge tank.  
Recheck the coolant level in the bottle next time you  
use your vehicle to insure the system is full when cold.  
See Engine Coolant on page 5-31.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Coolant in the Intercooler  
System (CTS-V)  
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler  
System Coolant (CTS-V)  
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking  
the coolant level.  
The super charged engine intercooler coolant fill bottle is  
located in the engine compartment on the passenger side  
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on  
page 5-14.  
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant fill bottle.  
If the coolant inside the coolant fill bottle is boiling, do not  
do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible  
but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL  
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant fill bottle, but be sure  
the cooling system is cool before this is done.  
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should be at  
or above the COLD FILL line on the side of the coolant fill  
bottle. If the engine is cold, the coolant level should be  
near the COLD FILL line on the side of the coolant fill  
bottle. If it is not, you could have a leak in the cooling  
system.  
1. Remove the intercooler system pressure cap when  
the intercooler system hoses are no longer hot. Turn  
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about  
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for  
that to stop. This allows any pressure still left to be  
vented.  
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and  
remove it.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the  
fill neck until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL  
line on the fill neck.  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.  
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.  
With the intercooler system pressure cap off, start  
the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes. Then  
turn the engine off. By this time, the coolant level  
inside the fill neck may be lower. If the level drops to  
where coolant is no longer visible in the horizontal  
tube section of the fill neck, with the engine off add  
more of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the fill  
neck until the level is again visible in the horizontal  
tube section  
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully  
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more  
information on location.  
Engine Overheating  
4. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.  
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine  
overheating.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.  
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.  
There are two engine hot messages that may be  
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for  
more information.  
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system  
cools down again, see your dealer/retailer.  
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning  
appears, but instead get service help right away.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle  
is parked on a level surface.  
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine  
Compartment  
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running.  
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.  
If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and  
have the vehicle serviced.  
{ CAUTION:  
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine  
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away  
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming  
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the  
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign  
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.  
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving  
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.  
The costly repairs would not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode on page 5-41 for information on  
driving to a safe place in an emergency.  
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or  
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it  
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the  
engine is cool.  
on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe  
place in an emergency.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)  
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the  
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let  
the engine idle.  
If No Steam Is Coming From The  
Engine Compartment  
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam  
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too  
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot  
when the vehicle:  
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the  
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer  
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive  
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe  
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the  
warning does not come back on, continue to drive  
normally.  
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.  
Stops after high-speed driving.  
Idles for long periods in traffic.  
Tows a trailer.  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the  
vehicle right away.  
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of  
steam:  
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for  
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still  
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,  
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”  
next in this section.  
1. Turn the air conditioning off.  
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and  
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as  
necessary.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode  
Power Steering Fluid  
Overview on page 5-14 for  
the location of the power  
steering fluid reservoir.  
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven  
to a safe place in an emergency. Should a hot engine  
condition exist, an overheat protection mode which  
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine  
damage. In this mode, there is a loss in power and engine  
performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing  
a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be  
avoided.  
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine  
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,  
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.  
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the  
cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See Engine  
Oil on page 5-18.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid  
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you  
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could  
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and  
repaired.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
What to Use  
To check the power steering fluid:  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
Always use the proper fluid.  
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment  
cool down.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the  
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by  
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid  
page 6-14.  
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.  
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a  
clean rag.  
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.  
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on  
the dipstick.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
The level should be between the HOT and COLD marks.  
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to  
the mark.  
When adding windshield washer fluid to the vehicle, be  
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before  
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area  
where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a  
fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
Adding Washer Fluid  
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.  
The Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid message will appear on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid level is  
low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for  
more information.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.  
Water can cause the solution to freeze and  
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of  
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as  
well as washer fluid.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid until the  
tank is full. See Engine  
page 5-14 for reservoir  
location.  
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full  
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid  
expansion if freezing occurs, which could  
damage the tank if it is completely full.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your  
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s  
windshield washer system and paint.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not  
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings  
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake  
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as  
necessary, only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
The brake master cylinder  
reservoir is filled with DOT  
3 brake fluid. See Engine  
page 5-14 for the location  
of the reservoir.  
{ CAUTION:  
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the  
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You  
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could  
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is  
done on the brake hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  
the reservoir might go down:  
If the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake fluid is low,  
the Service Brake System message displays in the DIC.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57.  
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal  
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,  
the fluid level goes back up.  
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake  
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning  
Light on page 3-38.  
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also  
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic  
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner  
or later the brakes will not work well.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
What to Add  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake  
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a  
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine  
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage  
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they  
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone  
put in the wrong kind of fluid.  
DOT 3 brake fluid is recommended. DOT 4 brake fluid is  
also compatible with the vehicle’s brake system parts.  
However, if DOT 4 fluid is used, it is recommended that  
the brake hydraulic system be flushed and refilled with  
new DOT 4 fluid at a regular maintenance service every  
two years. See Additional Required Services on  
page 6-6. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container  
page 6-14.  
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted  
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be  
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.  
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 5-113.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep  
dirt from entering the reservoir.  
{ CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic  
system, the brakes might not work well. This could  
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake Wear  
Brake Pedal Travel  
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have  
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning  
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are  
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the  
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the  
brake pedal firmly.  
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not  
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in  
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service  
might be required.  
Brake Adjustment  
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the  
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.  
{ CAUTION:  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
The brake wear warning sound means that soon  
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an  
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is  
heard, have the vehicle serviced.  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.  
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for  
example, when the brake linings wear down and new  
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved  
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might  
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake  
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance  
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the  
worse. The braking performance expected can change in  
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts  
are installed.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake  
pads could result in costly brake repair.  
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake  
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.  
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect  
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in  
the proper sequence to torque specifications in  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Storage  
Battery  
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. It is located  
in the trunk, behind the trim panel, on the passenger side  
of the vehicle. When it is time for a new battery, see your  
dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number  
shown on the original battery’s label.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
{ CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that  
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not  
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-48 for tips  
on working around a battery without getting hurt.  
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery.  
This helps keep the battery from running down.  
After a power loss, such as disconnecting the battery or  
removing the maxi fuses in the power distribution fuse  
block, the following steps must be performed to calibrate  
the electronic throttle control. If this is not done, the  
engine will not run properly.  
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery or  
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the  
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.  
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. Do not start the  
engine.  
2. Leave the ignition in ON/RUN for at least  
three minutes so that the electronic throttle  
control will cycle and re-learn its home position.  
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.  
4. Start and run the engine for at least 30 seconds.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt  
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems  
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
Jump Starting  
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to use  
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you do not want. You would not be able  
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could  
damage the electrical systems.  
{ CAUTION:  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous  
because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.  
They contain enough electricity to burn you.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set  
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in  
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic  
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission  
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or  
all of these things can hurt you.  
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories  
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be  
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the  
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other  
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered  
by the warranty.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off  
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This  
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And  
it could save the radio!  
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it  
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have  
a 12-volt battery with a negative ground  
system.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and  
negative () terminal locations or the remote  
positive (+) and remote negative () terminals of the  
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)  
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment  
Overview on page 5-14 for more information on  
locations the terminals.  
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the  
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting  
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM  
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach  
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative  
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,  
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
Your vehicle has a remote negative () ground  
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on  
the rear passenger side of the vehicle. See  
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14. You  
should always use this remote ground location,  
instead of the terminal on the battery.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,  
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if  
you need more light.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts  
once the engine is running.  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not  
need to add water to the battery installed in your  
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be  
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,  
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,  
explosive gas could be present.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or  
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a  
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to  
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy,  
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do  
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your  
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water  
and get medical help immediately.  
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you  
will get a short that would damage the battery  
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the  
negative () cable to the negative () terminal on  
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the  
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not let the other end touch anything until the  
next step. The other end of the negative () cable  
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a  
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the  
dead battery.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable at  
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,  
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical  
connection is just as good there, and the chance  
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.  
Use a remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has  
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative () ground  
location is for this purpose.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote  
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to  
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If  
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs  
service.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may  
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would  
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always  
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct  
order, making sure that the cables do not touch  
each other or other metal.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote  
Negative () Terminal  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote  
Negative () Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do  
the following:  
How to Check Lubricant  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle that had the dead battery.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other  
vehicle.  
All-Wheel Drive  
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, this is an  
additional system that needs lubrication.  
A. Drain Plug  
B. Fill Plug  
Transfer Case  
When to Check Lubricant  
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a  
level surface.  
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case  
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear  
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.  
Have it inspected and repaired.  
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,  
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some  
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the  
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten  
the plug.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What to Use  
How to Check Lubricant  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 6-14.  
Rear Axle  
When to Check Lubricant  
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid  
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an  
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.  
Have it inspected and repaired.  
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a  
level surface.  
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,  
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some  
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to  
the bottom of the filler plug hole.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The vehicle should:  
What to Use  
Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from  
a light colored wall.  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 6-14.  
Have all four tires on a level surface which is level  
all the way to the wall.  
Headlamp Aiming  
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming  
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.  
Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.  
Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while  
headlamp aiming is being performed.  
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the  
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be  
necessary.  
Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one  
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.  
Have all tires properly inflated.  
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this  
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.  
If your vehicle has a spare tire, ensure the spare tire  
is in its original location in the vehicle.  
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your  
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be  
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps  
as described.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam  
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly  
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.  
To adjust the vertical aim:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-13  
for more information.  
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps  
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam  
headlamp.  
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot  
on the low-beam headlamp.  
Halogen Headlamps  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to  
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.  
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the  
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.  
Driver Side Shown  
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which  
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.  
They are covered by a rubber caps.  
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam  
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may  
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause  
damage to the headlamp.  
The adjustment screw can be turned with a  
6 mm hex driver.  
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a  
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the  
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only  
the beam of light from the headlamp being  
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.  
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp  
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it  
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the  
angle of the beam.  
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at  
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb Replacement  
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see  
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-61.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this  
section, contact your dealer/retailer.  
High Intensity Discharge (HID)  
Lighting  
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is  
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape  
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct  
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the  
incorrect headlamp aim.  
{ CAUTION:  
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system  
operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service  
any of the system components, you could be  
seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a  
qualified technician service them.  
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite  
headlamp.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After the  
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you  
may notice that the beam is a slightly different  
shade than it was originally. This is normal.  
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps  
Halogen Bulbs  
{ CAUTION:  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and  
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or  
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow  
the instructions on the bulb package.  
To replace fog lamp bulb:  
1. Pull out the push-pins located on the underside of  
the protection shield to remove the shield.  
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from under  
the vehicle to access the lamp housing.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by  
lifting the two plastic clips.  
License Plate Lamp  
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
4. Remove the bulb socket from the lamp housing  
by turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn  
counterclockwise.  
5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp housing keeping the  
bulb straight as you pull it out.  
6. Install a new bulb.  
7. Reinstall the electrical connector by pushing in the  
two plastic clips.  
8. Push the bulb socket into the lamp housing and  
turn the socket one-quarter turn clockwise.  
1. Push tab to remove the license plate lamp.  
2. Turn the license plate lamp assembly down to  
remove it.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and remove it.  
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it.  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
5. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear  
or cracking. See Owner Checks and Services on  
page 6-10.  
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license  
plate lamp assembly.  
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade  
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper  
windshield wiper blade length and type, see  
Replacement Bulbs  
Exterior Lamp  
Fog Lamp (Up Level Only)  
License Plate Lamp  
Bulb Number  
H11LL  
To replace the wiper blade assembly:  
W5WLL  
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.  
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your  
dealer/retailer.  
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them  
off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe  
position. The driver side blade will be straight up  
and down on the windshield.  
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the  
windshield.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Lift up the wiper blade assembly cap.  
5. Pull the wiper blade assembly down far enough to  
release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.  
Slide the assembly away from the arm.  
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over  
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up  
on the assembly to lock it into place.  
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield  
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the  
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be  
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper  
blade arm to touch the windshield.  
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.  
6. Replace the blade with a new one.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet  
for details. For additional information refer to the tire  
manufacturer.  
Underinflated tires pose the same danger  
as overloaded tires. The resulting  
accident could cause serious injury.  
Check all tires frequently to maintain the  
recommended pressure. Tire pressure  
should be checked when your tires are  
page 5-72.  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden  
impact — such as when you hit a  
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended  
pressure.  
{ CAUTION:  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much  
flexing. You could have an air-out and a  
serious accident. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If  
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires  
have been damaged, replace them.  
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-74 for  
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed  
driving.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Low-Profile Performance Tires  
Winter Tires  
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, P235/50R18,  
255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size tires, they are  
classified as low-profile tires. These tires are  
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry  
pavement. You may also notice more road noise  
with low-profile performance tires and that they  
tend to wear faster.  
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads  
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.  
All season tires provide good overall performance on  
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you  
would like or the same level of performance as winter  
tires on snow or ice covered roads.  
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased  
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires,  
there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road  
noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter  
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.  
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,  
they are more susceptible to damage from road  
hazards or curb impact than standard profile  
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can  
occur when coming into contact with road  
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,  
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle  
warranty does not cover this type of damage.  
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure  
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,  
potholes, and other road hazards.  
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire  
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying  
New Tires on page 5-82.  
If you choose to use winter tires:  
Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all  
four wheel positions.  
Summer Performance Tires  
Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,  
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.  
Many General Motors high performance models  
come factory-equipped with tires that are optimized  
for maximum dry and wet road performance while  
still retaining satisfactory tread life, excellent  
durability, and low noise levels. In severe winter  
climates where snowfall may be significant, these  
tires may be found to provide less traction.  
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original  
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,  
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with  
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum  
speed capability.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,  
and service description. See the “Tire Size”  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into its  
sidewall. The examples below show a typical  
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire  
sidewall.  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The  
letters and numbers following DOT (Department  
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was  
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides  
of the tire, although only one side may have the  
date of manufacture.  
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire  
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on  
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,  
and temperature resistance. For more information  
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-84.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
Compact Spare Tire Example  
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare  
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of  
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should  
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).  
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when  
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your  
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact  
Spare Tire on page 5-108 and If a Tire Goes Flat on  
page 5-89.  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have  
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all  
federal safety guidelines.  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT (Department of  
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was  
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of  
the tire, although only one side may have the date  
of manufacture.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a  
typical passenger vehicle tire size.  
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or  
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi  
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure  
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-72.  
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States  
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P  
as the first character in the tire size means a  
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards  
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.  
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and  
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,  
construction type, and service description. The  
letter T as the first character in the tire size means  
the tire is for temporary use only.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as  
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean  
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as  
it is wide.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire  
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.  
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square  
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to  
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The  
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D  
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the  
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,  
power steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, and air conditioning.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in  
inches.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
(F) Service Description: These characters  
represent the load index and speed rating of the  
tire. The load index represents the load carry  
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed  
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to  
carry a load.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located  
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be  
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies  
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees  
to the centerline of the tread.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in  
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or  
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat  
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-72.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward  
when mounted on a vehicle.  
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with  
standard and optional equipment including the  
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but  
without passengers and cargo.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),  
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air  
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The  
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears  
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,  
and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same moldings on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for  
that tire.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-21.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation  
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See  
the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which  
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid  
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are  
determined by tire manufacturers using government  
testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the  
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality  
Grading on page 5-84.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs  
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to  
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a  
tire can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on  
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached  
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity  
weight and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and  
Loading Information Label” under Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a  
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.  
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-81.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.  
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Needless damage from road hazards  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to your vehicle. This label lists your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the  
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support your  
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Reduced fuel economy  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of  
the tire and loading information label, see Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-21. How you load your  
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.  
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it  
was designed to carry.  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to  
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire  
inflation pressure matches the recommended  
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information  
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the  
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the  
recommended amount.  
When to Check  
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not  
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your  
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be  
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information  
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact  
Spare Tire on page 5-108.  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire  
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly  
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires  
may look properly inflated even when they are  
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure  
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle  
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no  
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  
and moisture.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, 255/40ZR19 or  
285/35ZR19 size tires, they will require inflation  
pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds  
of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold inflation  
pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the  
tire sidewall, or 44 psi (300 kPa), whichever is lower. See  
the example following. When you end this high-speed  
driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See  
Pressure on page 5-72.  
High-Speed Operation  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or  
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained  
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up  
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have  
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some  
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure  
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed  
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle  
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires  
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent  
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation  
pressure for the vehicle load.  
Example:  
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure  
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near  
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum  
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.  
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for  
high-speed driving at 44 psi (300 kPa).  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS  
low tire pressure telltale.  
Tire Pressure Monitor System  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio  
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The  
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s  
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver  
located in the vehicle.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is  
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator  
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When  
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash  
for approximately one minute and then remain  
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue  
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the  
malfunction exists.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on  
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your  
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you  
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for  
those tires.)  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system  
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as  
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety  
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or  
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS  
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or  
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or  
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to  
function properly.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or  
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as so  
on as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.  
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the  
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-76 for  
additional information.  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada  
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation  
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when  
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are  
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding  
the spare tire and wheel assembly, if the vehicle has  
one. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the  
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to  
a receiver located in the vehicle.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on  
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver  
can also check tire pressure levels using the DIC. For  
additional information and details about the DIC operation  
and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on  
page 3-50 and DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-57.  
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and  
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
When a low tire pressure  
condition is detected, the  
TPMS illuminates the low  
tire pressure warning light  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A DIC warning message to check the pressure in a  
specific tire is also shown on the DIC display screen.  
The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning  
message come at each ignition cycle until the tires are  
inflated to the correct inflation pressure.  
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire  
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire  
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-80 and Tires on page 5-63.  
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could  
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)  
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using  
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the  
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire  
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.  
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool  
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then  
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early  
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting  
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.  
The Tire and Loading Information label, attached to  
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original  
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the  
tires when they are cold. See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-21, for an example of the Tire and Loading  
Information label and its location on your vehicle.  
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72.  
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved  
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants  
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and  
Compressor Kit on page 5-90 for information regarding  
the inflator kit materials and instructions.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or  
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS  
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS  
sensors are installed and the sensor matching  
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message  
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of  
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light  
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the  
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message  
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC  
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the  
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can  
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come  
on are:  
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires  
and wheels other than those recommended for your  
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning  
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-82.  
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities  
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS  
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.  
One of the road tires has been replaced with the  
spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare tire does  
not have a TPMS sensor. The DIC message should  
go off once you re-install the road tire containing the  
TPMS sensor.  
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a  
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if  
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on  
and stays on.  
The TPMS sensor matching process was not  
done or not completed successfully after rotating  
the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message should go off  
after successfully completing the sensor matching  
process. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”  
later in this section.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s  
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for  
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice  
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and Tire  
Learning Active message displays on the DIC  
screen.  
TPMS Sensor Matching Process  
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any  
time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or  
rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need to  
be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors  
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following  
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,  
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a  
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for  
service.  
4. Start with the driver side front tire.  
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem. Activate  
the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the  
tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, or until a horn  
chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which can take up to  
30 seconds to sound, confirms that the TPMS sensor  
identification code has been matched to this tire  
position.  
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/  
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air  
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not  
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the  
tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the  
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure  
gage, or a key.  
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel  
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four  
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,  
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than  
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions,  
the matching process stops and you need to start over.  
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the  
procedure in Step 5.  
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp, for the  
driver side rear tire, the horn sounds two more  
times to signal the tire learning mode is no longer  
active. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.  
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:  
1. Set the parking brake.  
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure  
level as indicated on the tire and loading information  
label.  
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the  
engine off.  
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your  
tires as soon as possible and check wheel  
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.  
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-86.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
Inspect tires regularly for signs of wear or damage.  
Also inspect the spare tire, if the vehicle has one.  
For more information on tire inspection, see When It  
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-81.  
Tire rotation is not recommended if the vehicle  
has 255/40R19 size tires on the front wheels and  
285/35R19 size tires on the rear wheels.  
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to  
rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used  
in its original front or rear position.  
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has  
the same size tires on all four wheel positions.  
These tires should be rotated every 5,000  
to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). See  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.  
Use the rotation pattern shown here when rotating  
tires of the same size installed on all four wheel  
positions.  
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve  
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This  
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform  
most like it did when the tires were new.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front  
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire  
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-72 and Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-21.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,  
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions  
influence when you need new tires.  
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly  
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under  
One way to tell when it is  
time for new tires is to  
check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of  
tread remaining.  
{ CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause a crash. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a  
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure  
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you  
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You need new tires if any of the following statements  
are true:  
Buying New Tires  
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your  
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your  
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification  
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,  
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the  
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will  
continue to have tires that are designed to give the same  
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as  
the original tires.  
You can see the indicators at three or more places  
around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged  
deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that  
cannot be repaired well because of the size or  
location of the damage.  
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a  
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall  
performance of your vehicle, including brake system  
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire  
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec  
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire  
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC  
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and  
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-65, for  
additional information.  
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are  
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your  
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this  
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading  
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With  
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out  
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about  
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult  
the tire manufacturer for more information.  
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is  
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep  
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires  
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect  
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80.  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original  
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y  
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with  
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum  
speed capability.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the  
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel  
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use  
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the  
vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while  
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other  
than those originally installed on your vehicle),  
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the  
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could  
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other  
than those originally installed on your vehicle),  
brands or types, may also cause damage to your  
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand,  
and type tires on all four wheels.  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do  
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the  
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction  
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s  
original tires.  
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system  
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if  
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC  
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is  
higher or lower than the proper warning level you  
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure  
Monitor System on page 5-75.  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the  
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-21, for more information about  
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location  
on your vehicle.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than  
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect  
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride  
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance  
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic  
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and  
electronic stability control, the performance of these  
systems can be affected.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare  
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of  
{ CAUTION:  
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may  
not provide an acceptable level of performance and  
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels  
are selected. You may increase the chance that you  
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM  
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your  
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM  
certified technician.  
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
See Buying New Tires on page 5-82 and Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-4 for additional information.  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based  
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified government  
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would  
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100. The  
relative performance of tires depends upon the  
actual conditions of their use, however, and may  
depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices, and differences  
in road characteristics and climate.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The  
grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the  
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law. It should be noted that  
the temperature grade for this tire is established for  
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive  
loading, either separately or in combination, can  
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts  
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original  
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the  
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and  
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest  
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to  
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary  
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire  
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the  
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your  
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires  
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your  
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.  
{ CAUTION:  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,  
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It  
could affect the braking and handling of your  
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you  
lose control. You could have a collision in which  
you or others could be injured. Always use the  
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for  
replacement.  
CTS-V models should only use adhesive wheel weights  
to balance the tires and wheels.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted  
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,  
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the  
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum  
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your  
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems  
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,  
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to  
the body and chassis.  
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted  
the same way as the one it replaces.  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel  
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and  
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure  
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to  
replace them, be sure to get new GM original  
equipment wheel nuts.  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause a crash. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a  
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure  
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you  
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead  
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  
torque specification.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of  
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might  
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing  
a crash.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Used Replacement Wheels  
Tire Chains  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.  
You cannot know how it has been used or how  
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and  
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use  
a new GM original equipment wheel.  
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough  
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without  
the proper amount of clearance can cause  
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other  
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire  
chains could cause you to lose control of the  
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a  
crash. Use another type of traction device only if  
its manufacturer recommends it for use on the  
vehicle and tire size combination and road  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.  
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,  
re-adjust or remove the device if it is contacting  
the vehicle, and do not spin the wheels. If you do  
find traction devices that will fit, install them on the  
rear tires.  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Inspect the flat tire.  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,  
especially if you maintain the tires properly. See Tires on  
page 5-63. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to  
leak out slowly. But, if you should ever have a blow out,  
here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:  
{ CAUTION:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that  
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer  
to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop  
well out of the traffic lane.  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the  
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack  
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for  
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,  
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the  
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with  
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.  
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like a  
skid and may require the same correction you would use  
in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot from the  
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by  
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be  
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a  
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and  
spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-100.  
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage  
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.  
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard  
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatic  
transmission, set the parking brake firmly and put  
the shift lever in P (Park). If your vehicle has a  
manual transmission, move the shift lever to  
R (Reverse) and set the parking brake firmly.  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or  
other equipment in the passenger compartment of  
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or  
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.  
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its  
original location.  
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor  
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may  
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon  
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.  
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has  
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-51.  
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,  
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,  
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to  
store a tire.  
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to  
1
temporarily seal punctures up to 4 inch (6 mm) in the  
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate  
an under inflated tire.  
{ CAUTION:  
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture  
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to  
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit  
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended  
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended  
pressure.  
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has  
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too  
severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit  
to be effective. See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor  
kit instructions.  
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This vehicle may have one of the following tire sealant  
and compressor kits. The kit includes:  
A. Selector Switch  
(Sealant/Air or  
E. Tire Sealant Canister  
Sealant/Air Hose  
(Clear)  
Air Only)  
B. On/Off Button  
C. Pressure Gage  
D. Pressure Deflation  
Button (If equipped)  
F. Air Only Hose  
(Black)  
G. Power Plug  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Sealant  
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor  
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a  
Punctured Tire  
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the  
label adhered to the sealant canister.  
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant  
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before  
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are  
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and  
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.  
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.  
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After  
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose  
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and  
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Place the kit on the ground.  
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to  
the ground so the hose will reach it.  
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by  
turning it counterclockwise.  
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve  
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.  
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power  
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other  
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power  
Outlet(s) on page 3-22.  
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not  
use the cigarette lighter.  
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the  
cigarette lighter.  
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during  
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment  
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.  
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or  
window.  
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat  
on page 5-89. Do not remove any objects that have  
penetrated the tire.  
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while  
using the air compressor.  
8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to the  
Sealant + Air position.  
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its  
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor  
Kit Storage on page 5-98.  
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power  
plug (H).  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the tire sealant  
and compressor kit on.  
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be  
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle  
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely  
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit  
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from  
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating  
hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Service on  
page 7-8.  
The compressor will inject sealant and air into  
the tire.  
The pressure gage (C) will initially show a  
high pressure while the compressor pushes the  
sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely  
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop  
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.  
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant  
and compressor kit off.  
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure  
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended  
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-72.  
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until  
the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in  
the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through 18 must be done  
immediately after Step 11.  
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and  
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.  
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the  
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.  
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure  
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until  
the correct pressure is reached.  
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory  
power outlet in the vehicle.  
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to  
remove it from the tire valve stem.  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.  
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.  
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire  
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to  
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”  
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power  
plug (H) back in their original location.  
16. If the flat tire was  
able to inflate to the  
recommended inflation  
pressure, remove  
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi  
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,  
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely  
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-8.  
the maximum speed  
label from the sealant  
canister (E) and  
place it in a highly  
visible location.  
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than  
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation  
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and  
vehicle.  
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph  
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired  
or replaced.  
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and sealant/  
air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in  
accordance with local state codes and practices.  
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your  
dealer/retailer.  
17. Return the equipment to its original storage location  
in the vehicle.  
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant  
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized  
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving  
to have the tire repaired or replaced.  
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to  
distribute the sealant in the tire.  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor  
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire  
(Not Punctured)  
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only  
and not sealant:  
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat  
on page 5-89.  
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its  
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor  
Kit Storage on page 5-98.  
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and the power plug (H).  
3. Place the kit on the ground.  
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to  
the ground so the hose will reach it.  
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by  
turning it counterclockwise.  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the tire valve stem  
by turning it clockwise until it is tight.  
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the  
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn  
the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The  
compressor may be turned on/off until the correct  
pressure is reached.  
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power  
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other  
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power  
Outlet(s) on page 3-22.  
If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended  
pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by  
pressing the pressure deflation button (D), if  
equipped, until the proper pressure reading is  
reached. This option is only functional when using  
the air only hose (G).  
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not  
use the cigarette lighter.  
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the  
cigarette lighter.  
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or  
window.  
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant  
and compressor kit off.  
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while  
using the air compressor.  
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and  
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.  
8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the Air  
Only position.  
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory  
power outlet in the vehicle.  
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the compressor on.  
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.  
13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valve  
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace  
the tire valve stem cap.  
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure  
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended  
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-72.  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Replace the air only hose (G) and the power  
plug (H) and cord back in its original location.  
Removal and Installation of the Sealant  
Canister  
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location  
in the vehicle.  
To remove the sealant canister:  
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.  
2. Press the canister release button.  
3. Pull up and remove the canister.  
4. Replace with a new canister which is available from  
your dealer/retailer.  
5. Push the new canister into place.  
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
Storage  
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the  
trunk.  
The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory  
adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of  
its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,  
balls, etc.  
5-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without  
Pressure Deflation Button  
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit with  
Pressure Deflation Button  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-20.  
A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
B. Foam Container  
C. Wing Nut  
2. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and  
compressor kit in place.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-20.  
3. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from  
the foam container.  
2. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit (A) in the  
center of the cargo area.  
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the  
steps.  
3. Remove the wing nut (C) that holds the tire sealant  
and compressor kit (A) in place.  
4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit (A)  
from the foam container (B).  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following  
example as a guide to assist you in the placement  
of wheel blocks (A).  
Changing a Flat Tire  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage  
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard  
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers  
on page 3-6.  
{ CAUTION:  
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle  
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or  
other people. You and they could be badly injured  
or even killed. Find a level place to change your  
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).  
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while  
the vehicle is raised.  
A. Wheel Block  
B. Flat Tire  
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the  
vehicle.  
The following information explains how to use the jack  
and change a tire.  
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,  
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the  
tire farthest away from the one being changed.  
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the  
opposite end of the vehicle.  
5-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking equipment,  
do the following:  
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  
1. Remove the spare tire cover.  
2. Remove the stow rod cap by pulling it straight up  
off of the rod.  
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the compact spare tire (B)  
counterclockwise to remove it.  
4. Remove the spare tire and place it next to the  
flat tire.  
5. The tools you will be using next include the jack (C),  
wheel wrench (D), and extension (E).  
A. Wing Nut  
B. Spare Tire  
C. Jack  
D. Wheel Wrench  
E. Extension  
F. Strap  
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the Flat Tire and  
Installing the Spare Tire  
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing  
a Flat Tire on page 5-100 for more information.  
3. Find the jacking location using the diagram above  
and corresponding V-shaped locating notches  
located in the plastic molding.  
2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them yet,  
using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle about  
180 degrees, then return the handle back to the  
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off  
the lug nut for each turn.  
5-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you  
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a  
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.  
{ CAUTION:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the  
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack  
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for  
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,  
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the  
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with  
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.  
4. Insert the hooked end of the extension handle  
through the jack and the flat end through the  
wheel wrench.  
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make  
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and  
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into  
the proper location before raising the vehicle.  
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker  
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could  
break the molding and/or cause other damage to  
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when  
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the  
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.  
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench  
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into  
the metal flange located behind the V–shaped  
locating notches on the plastic molding as shown.  
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower  
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the  
vehicle.  
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.  
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench  
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the  
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the  
vehicle.  
5-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Remove all the wheel  
nuts and the flat tire.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because  
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel  
could fall off, causing a crash.  
10. Remove any rust or dirt  
from the wheel bolts,  
mounting surfaces, and  
spare wheel.  
{ CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is  
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after  
time. The wheel could come off and cause an  
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust  
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper  
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire  
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-100.  
11. Install the spare tire.  
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of  
the nuts toward the wheel.  
5-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with  
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.  
15. Tighten the wheel nuts  
firmly in a crisscross  
sequence as shown.  
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench  
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.  
{ CAUTION:  
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly  
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or  
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with  
a torque wrench to the proper torque specification  
after replacing. Follow the torque specification  
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when  
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities  
and Specifications on page 5-133 for original  
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.  
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and  
Tools  
{ CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the  
passenger compartment of the vehicle could  
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose  
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in  
the proper place.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can  
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque  
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on  
page 5-133 for the wheel nut torque specification.  
5-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Route the hook end of  
the strap through the  
wheel.  
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load  
Floor  
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear  
storage compartment and put the compartment  
cover back on.  
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag, if there  
is one.  
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the rear storage  
compartment.  
4. Route the loop end of  
the strap (C) through  
one of the cargo  
8. Attach the hook to the cargo tie-down in the rear of  
the vehicle.  
tie-downs (A) located in  
the rear of the vehicle.  
9. Slide the buckle to tighten the cargo tie-down strap.  
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the  
compact spare tire in the trunk.  
5. Route the hook (B) through the loop (C).  
6. Pull the strap to tighten it around the cargo  
tie-down (A).  
5-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compact Spare Tire and Tools  
Compact Spare Tire  
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the  
compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a  
time could result in loss of braking and handling.  
This could lead to a crash and you or others could  
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at  
a time.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire it  
was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can  
lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure  
regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).  
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as  
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly  
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at  
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to  
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and  
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your  
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare  
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will  
last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed  
again.  
A. Wing Nut  
B. Compact Spare Tire D. Wheel Wrench  
or Flat Tire (valve  
stem down)  
Reverse the instructions for removing the spare tire and  
tools to store the compact spare tire.  
C. Jack  
E. Extension  
F. Strap  
5-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not  
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with  
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the  
rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other  
parts of the vehicle.  
Appearance Care  
Interior Cleaning  
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is  
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt  
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage  
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular  
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the  
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from  
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be  
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior  
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains  
to set rapidly.  
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.  
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with  
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the  
spare tire and its wheel together.  
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.  
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage  
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the  
compact spare.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments  
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer  
color to the vehicle’s interior.  
5-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners  
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.  
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on  
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass  
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray  
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s  
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained  
from your dealer/retailer.  
Do not clean the vehicle using:  
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil  
from any interior surface.  
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
interior surfaces.  
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning  
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass  
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.  
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a  
soft cloth and glass cleaner.  
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a  
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage  
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness  
of soil removal.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before  
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions  
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,  
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s  
doors and windows.  
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with  
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and  
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per  
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use  
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs  
using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.  
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that  
can damage the vehicle’s interior.  
5-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub  
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean  
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.  
Fabric/Carpet  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment  
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister  
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used  
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,  
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.  
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as  
possible using one of the following techniques:  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild  
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process  
that was used with plain water.  
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner  
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial  
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small  
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned  
area gives any impression that a ring formation may  
result, clean the entire surface.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper  
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel  
until no more can be removed.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and  
then vacuum.  
To clean:  
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper  
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the  
fabric or carpet.  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or  
club soda.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
5-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Leather  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove  
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft  
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.  
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.  
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters  
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather  
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and  
protect leather may permanently change the appearance  
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not  
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing  
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a  
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove  
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean  
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be  
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot  
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial  
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and  
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change  
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not  
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based  
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean  
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the  
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform  
manner.  
Some commercial products may increase gloss on  
the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause  
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make  
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain  
conditions.  
5-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wood Panels  
Weatherstrips  
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use  
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately  
with a clean cloth.  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather frequent application may be required. See  
Speaker Covers  
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the  
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just  
water and mild soap.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep  
it clean by washing it often.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can  
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.  
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that  
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it  
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would  
not be covered by the warranty.  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car  
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as  
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the  
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained  
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’  
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary  
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any  
vehicle care product.  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely  
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able  
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts  
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.  
5-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to  
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are  
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by  
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint  
finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from  
your dealer/retailer.  
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton  
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the  
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer  
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.  
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)  
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.  
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the  
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are  
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may  
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and  
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish on the vehicle.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car  
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.  
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on  
page 5-113.  
5-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird  
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,  
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted  
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If  
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked  
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.  
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper  
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild  
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when  
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a  
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause  
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are  
worn or damaged.  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep  
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.  
Wipers can be damaged by:  
Extreme dusty conditions  
Sand and salt  
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts  
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep  
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually  
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on  
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.  
Heat and sun  
Snow and ice, without proper removal  
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging  
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or  
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed  
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.  
5-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The surface of these wheels is similar to the  
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels  
and Trim  
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong  
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,  
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them  
because they could damage the surface. Do not use  
chrome polish on aluminum wheels.  
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels.  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild  
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing  
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then  
be applied.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels  
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on  
chrome wheels only.  
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may  
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving  
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,  
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are  
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.  
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and  
water after exposure.  
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but  
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off  
immediately after application.  
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car  
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,  
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the  
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with  
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an  
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire  
cleaning brushes.  
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive  
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain  
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could  
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs  
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only  
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels.  
5-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
Underbody Maintenance  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not  
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,  
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion  
protection.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish  
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always  
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces  
on the vehicle.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud  
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the  
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your  
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can  
do this.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop  
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or  
replaced to restore corrosion protection.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide  
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle  
warranty.  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can  
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and  
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish  
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode  
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will  
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of  
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up  
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger  
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your  
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.  
5-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Identification  
Vehicle Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This  
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,  
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”  
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-133 for  
the vehicle’s engine code.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if  
parts need to be ordered. The label has the following  
information:  
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a  
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on  
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield  
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on  
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and  
the certificates of title and registration.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Model designation  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
5-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
Electrical System  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal  
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to  
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools  
and will then restart.  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle  
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some  
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and  
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s  
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can  
keep other components from working as they should.  
Power Windows and Other Power  
Options  
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power  
windows and other power accessories. When the  
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and  
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or  
goes away.  
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if  
the vehicle is not operating.  
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing  
5-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
Underhood Fuse Block (CTS)  
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit  
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires  
caused by electrical problems.  
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger  
side of the engine compartment.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you  
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  
and rating.  
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have  
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same  
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you  
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette  
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.  
Replace it as soon as you can.  
Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses.  
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components  
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the  
covers on any electrical component.  
5-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mini-Fuses  
A/C CLTCH  
ABS  
Usage  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
Antilock Braking System (ABS)  
Adaptive Forward Lighting System  
Mini-Fuses  
AIRBAG IGN Airbag Switch  
Usage  
AWD  
BCM 1  
All-Wheel Drive  
Body Control Module 1  
AFS  
5-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mini-Fuses  
BCM 2  
BCM 3  
BCM 4  
BCM 5  
Usage  
Body Control Module 2  
Body Control Module 3  
Body Control Module 4  
Body Control Module 5  
Spare  
Mini-Fuses  
Usage  
HORN  
LO BEAM  
DRL LEFT  
Horn  
Low-Beam Daytime Running  
Lamps (Left)  
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp  
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp  
DRL/LT LO  
BEAM  
SPARE  
Daytime Running Lamps/Left  
Low-Beam Headlamp  
Cigarette Lighter  
Ignition  
Navigation Motor  
Odd Coils  
BCM 6, BCM 7 Body Control Module 6 and 7  
DISPLY  
DRL RT  
Display  
LTR  
Right Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield  
Washer Pump  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
ECM, Transmission Control  
MISC IGN  
NAV MTR  
ODD COILS  
PED PRO  
DRL/WSW  
ECM  
Not Used  
ECM/TCM IGN Module (TCM), Instrument Panel  
Cluster (IPC), PASS-Key III+ Module  
PassKey Module, Body Control  
Module  
PWR MODING  
EMIS 1  
EMIS 2  
EVEN COILS Even Coils  
Emission 1  
Emission 2  
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp  
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp  
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp  
FRT FOG  
Front Fog Lamps  
SPARE  
SPARE  
Spare  
Spare  
HDM WASH Headlamp Driver Module Washer  
5-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mini-Fuses  
STR/WHL/  
ILLUM  
Usage  
J-Case Fuses  
STRTR  
SPARE  
WSW/HTR  
Usage  
Starter  
Spare  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
Transmission Control Module  
Battery  
Windshield Washer Heater  
TCM BATT  
MAN SPD  
SNSR  
WPR  
ENG PUMP  
Manual Speed Sensor  
Relays  
A/C CMPRSR  
CLTCH  
Usage  
Windshield Wiper  
Engine Pump  
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch  
Daytime Running Lamps  
DRL (W/O HID) (without High Intensity Discharge),  
LO BEAM (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps (High  
Intensity Discharge)  
J-Case Fuses  
ABS MTR  
BLWR  
BRK VAC  
PUMP  
Usage  
ABS Motor  
Blower  
ENG PUMP  
FAN S/P  
FAN 1  
Engine Pump  
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel  
Cooling Fan 1  
Brake Vacuum Pump  
FAN 1  
FAN 2  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
FAN 2  
HI BEAM  
HORN  
Cooling Fan 2  
High-Beam Headlamp  
Horn  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger  
SPARE  
EPB  
SPARE  
Spare  
Electric Park Brake  
Spare  
IGN 1  
LO BEAM  
Ignition 1  
Low-Beam (without High Intensity  
(W/O HID) LT Discharge), Left Daytime Running  
DRL (HID)  
Lamp (High Intensity Discharge)  
5-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Underhood Fuse Block (CTS-V)  
Relays  
PWR/TRN  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger  
Usage  
Powertrain  
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger  
side of the engine compartment.  
SPARE  
STRTR  
WPR  
Spare  
Starter  
Windshield Wiper  
WPR HI  
Windshield Wiper High Speed  
WSW PUMP Windshield Washer Pump  
FOG LAMP  
Fog Lamps  
Right Daytime Running Lamp  
(High Intensity Discharge)  
RT DRL (HID)  
Circuit  
Breakers  
Usage  
HEAD LAMP  
WASH  
Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses.  
Headlamp Washer  
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components  
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the  
covers on any electrical component.  
5-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mini-Fuses  
A/C CLTCH  
ABS  
Usage  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
Antilock Braking System (ABS)  
Adaptive Forward Lighting System  
Mini-Fuses  
AIRBAG IGN Airbag Switch  
S/ROOF  
BCM 1  
Usage  
Sunroof  
Body Control Module 1  
AFS  
5-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mini-Fuses  
BCM 2  
BCM 3  
BCM 4  
BCM 5  
Usage  
Body Control Module 2  
Body Control Module 3  
Body Control Module 4  
Body Control Module 5  
Spare  
Mini-Fuses  
LTR  
MISC IGN  
NAV MTR  
ODD COILS  
PED PRO  
Usage  
Cigarette Lighter  
Ignition  
Navigation Motor  
Odd Coils  
Not Used  
SPARE  
BCM 6, BCM 7 Body Control Module 6 and 7  
PassKey Module, Body Control  
Module  
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp  
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp  
PWR MODING  
DISPLY  
DRL RT  
Display  
Right Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield  
Washer Pump  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
ECM, Transmission Control  
DRL/WSW  
ECM  
SPARE  
SPARE  
SPARE  
STR/WHL/  
ILLUM  
Spare  
Spare  
Spare  
ECM/TCM IGN Module (TCM), Instrument Panel  
Cluster (IPC), PASS-Key III+ Module  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
EMIS 1  
EMIS 2  
Emission 1  
Emission 2  
Transmission Control Module  
Battery  
TCM BATT  
EVEN COILS Even Coils  
SPARE  
WPR  
INCLR  
Spare  
Windshield Wiper  
Intercooler Pump  
FRT FOG  
Front Fog Lamps  
HDM WASH Headlamp Driver Module Washer  
HORN  
Horn  
DRL LT  
Left Daytime Running Lamps  
J-Case Fuses  
ABS MTR  
BLWR  
Usage  
ABS Motor  
Blower  
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp  
SPARE Spare  
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp  
SPARE  
Spare  
5-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J-Case Fuses  
FAN 1  
Usage  
Relays  
LT DRL  
PWR/TRN  
Usage  
Left Daytime Running Lamps  
Powertrain  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
FAN 2  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger  
SPARE  
EPB  
MRTD  
STRTR  
SPARE  
WSW/HTR  
Spare  
SPARE  
STRTR  
WPR  
Spare  
Starter  
Electric Park Brake  
MR Ride/Suspension Control  
Starter  
Windshield Wiper  
Windshield Wiper High Speed  
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield  
Washer Pump  
Fog Lamps  
Right Daytime Running Lamp  
WPR HI  
Spare  
DRL/WSW  
Windshield Washer Heater  
FOG LAMP  
RT DRL  
Relays  
Usage  
A/C CMPRSR  
CLTCH  
LO BEAM  
INCL  
FAN S/P  
FAN 1  
FAN 2  
HI BEAM  
HORN  
IGN 1  
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch  
Circuit  
Usage  
Breakers  
Low Beam  
HEAD LAMP  
WASH  
Intercooler Pump  
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
High-Beam Headlamp  
Horn  
Headlamp Washer  
Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS)  
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of  
the battery, on the right side of the trunk. The battery  
access door must be removed to access the fuse block.  
Ignition 1  
5-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relays  
Usage  
Relays  
Usage  
Left Position Lamp  
Not Used  
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump  
LT/POS/LP  
REAR/FOG  
LCK  
Lock  
5-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relays  
Usage  
Mini-Fuses  
Usage  
RT/POS/LP  
Right Position Lamp  
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump  
FUEL/DR/  
RELSE  
LT/POS/LP  
MSM  
Left Position Lamp  
Not Used  
Stoplamp  
Memory Seat Module  
OnStar® System  
Passenger Door Module  
Audio System  
STOP/LP  
ONSTAR  
PDM  
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release  
UNLCK  
Unlock  
RDO  
RDO/SPKR  
REAR/FOG  
Audio Speakers  
Not Used  
Mini-Fuses  
AIRBAG  
AMP  
Usage  
Airbag System  
Amplifier  
RKE/  
PASS-KEY/  
MDL  
Remote Keyless Entry System,  
Pass-Key Theft Deterrent Feature  
Module  
AUX/OUTLET Auxiliary Power Outlet  
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent  
RT/POS/LP  
RT/POS/LP  
RVC/SNSR  
Right Position Lamp  
DR/LCK  
ECM  
Door Lock  
Right Position Lamp  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor  
5-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mini-Fuses  
S/ROOF  
SPARE  
Usage  
Circuit  
Usage  
Breakers  
Sunroof  
Spare  
PWR/WNDW Power Window  
RT FRT/  
Right Front Power Seat  
SPARE  
Spare  
PWR/SEAT  
STOP/LP  
Stoplamp  
LT/REAR/  
WNDW  
Left Rear Window  
Theft Deterrent System, Universal  
Home Remote System  
THEFT/UGDO  
REAR/WNDW Right Rear Window  
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release  
Rear Compartment Fuse  
Block (CTS-V)  
Circuit  
Breakers  
Usage  
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of  
the battery, on the right side of the trunk. The battery  
access door must be removed to access the fuse block.  
LF FRT/  
Left Front Power Seat  
Power Steering Column  
PWR/SEAT  
PWR CLMN  
5-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relays  
Usage  
Relays  
Usage  
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump  
REAR/FOG  
RT/POS/LP  
Not Used  
Right Position Lamp  
LCK  
Lock  
Left Position Lamp  
LT/POS/LP  
5-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relays  
FUEL/  
DR/RELSE  
STOP/LP  
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release  
Usage  
Usage  
Mini-Fuses  
RT/POS/LP  
RT/POS/LP  
RVC/SNSR  
FSCM  
SPARE  
SPARE  
STOP/LP  
Usage  
Right Position Lamp  
Right Position Lamp  
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor  
Fuel System Control Module  
Spare  
Spare  
Stoplamp  
Theft Deterrent System, Universal  
Home Remote System  
Not Used  
Stoplamp  
UNLCK  
Unlock  
Mini-Fuses  
AIRBAG  
AMP  
Airbag System  
Amplifier  
THEFT/UGDO  
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release  
AUX/OUTLET Auxiliary Power Outlet  
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent  
DR/LCK  
ECM  
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump  
LT/POS/LP  
MSM  
ONSTAR  
PDM  
RDO  
RDO/SPKR  
REAR/FOG  
Door Lock  
Engine Control Module (ECM)  
Circuit  
Usage  
Breakers  
LF FRT/  
PWR/SEAT  
PWR CLMN  
PWR/WNDW Power Window  
RT FRT/  
PWR/SEAT  
LT/REAR/  
WNDW  
REAR/WNDW Right Rear Window  
Left Front Power Seat  
Power Steering Column  
Left Position Lamp  
Memory Seat Module  
OnStar® System  
Passenger Door Module  
Audio System  
Audio Speakers  
Not Used  
Right Front Power Seat  
Left Rear Window  
RKE/  
PASS-KEY/  
MDL  
Remote Keyless Entry System,  
Pass-Key Theft Deterrent Feature  
Module  
5-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-14 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge  
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located  
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more  
information.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a  
Cooling System  
3.6L V6 Engine (VIN Code 7)  
3.6L V6 Engine (VIN Code V)  
6.2L V8 Engine — Cooling System  
6.2L V8 Engine — Intercooler Cooling System  
Engine Oil with Filter  
10.3 qt  
10.6 qt  
13.4 qt  
3.2 qt  
9.7 L  
10.0 L  
12.7 L  
3.0 L  
3.6L V6 Engine  
6.0 qt  
6.0 qt  
5.7 L  
5.7 L  
68.1 L  
1.0 L  
6.2L V8 Engine  
Fuel Tank  
18.0 gal  
1.1 qt  
Transfer Case — AWD  
5-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
Transmission Fluid  
6-Speed Automatic CTS  
6-Speed Automatic CTS-V  
6-Speed Manual CTS  
6-Speed Manual CTS-V  
Wheel Nut Torque  
6.7 qt  
6.7 qt  
6.3 L  
6.3 L  
1.9 qt  
1.8 L  
4.0 qt  
3.8 L  
140 lb ft  
190 Y  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this  
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
3.6L V6 Engine  
VIN Code  
Transmission  
Spark Plug Gap  
Automatic  
Manual  
7
0.043 in (1.1 mm)  
Automatic  
Manual  
3.6L V6 Engine  
6.2L V8 Engine  
V
P
0.043 in (1.1 mm)  
0.040 in (1.0 mm)  
Automatic  
Manual  
5-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Maintenance Schedule  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,  
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and  
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary  
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.  
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled  
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and  
change as recommended.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep  
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps  
the environment. All recommended maintenance is  
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect  
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or  
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions  
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to  
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain  
the vehicle properly.  
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan  
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty  
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer  
for details.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
should be performed when indicated. See Additional  
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working  
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will  
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a  
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances  
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might  
use the vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might  
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.  
{ CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be  
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be  
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work  
only if you have the required know-how and the  
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you  
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have  
a qualified technician do the work. See Doing  
Your Own Service Work on page 5-5.  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need  
more frequent checks and replacements. So please  
read the following and note how you drive. If you have  
any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good  
condition, see your dealer/retailer.  
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.  
Some maintenance services can be complex.  
So, unless you are technically qualified and have  
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer  
do these jobs.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  
driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-6.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained  
and supported service technicians will perform the  
work using genuine parts.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this  
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service  
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures  
and wear. See Tires on page 5-63. Rotate tires. See Tire  
Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80 and “Tire Wear  
Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on page 6-11.  
To purchase service information, see Service  
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells what  
should be checked, when to check it, and what  
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in  
good condition.  
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to  
on page 6-14 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on  
page 6-16. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure  
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all  
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives  
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts  
from your dealer/retailer.  
displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), service  
is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as  
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).  
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,  
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle  
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine  
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at  
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer  
has trained service technicians who will perform this work  
using genuine parts and reset the system.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,  
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since  
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system  
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System  
on page 5-21 for information on the Engine Oil Life  
System and resetting the system.  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80 and  
“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on  
page 6-11.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid  
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message appears,  
the following services, checks, and inspections are  
required:  
levels and add fluid as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services.  
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on  
page 5-18. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service.  
Inspect suspension and steering components.  
See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Visually check for any leaks or damage.  
See footnote (k).  
Inspect restraint system components.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace  
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-25.  
See footnote (l).  
See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)  
shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
page 5-25. See footnote (n).  
Replace passenger compartment air  
filter. See footnote (g).  
Change automatic transmission fluid and  
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).  
Change automatic transmission fluid  
and filter (normal service).  
CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manual  
transmission fluid (severe service only).  
See footnote (o).  
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change  
transfer case fluid (severe service).  
See footnotes (q) and (r).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change  
transfer case fluid (normal service).  
See footnote (q).  
CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutch  
fluid. See footnote (o).  
CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid  
(severe service only). See footnote (o).  
CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid  
(severe service only). See footnote (o).  
Replace spark plugs. An Emission  
Control Service.  
Engine cooling system service (or  
every five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (i).  
6.2L Supercharged V8 Engine:  
Intercooler system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
See footnote (p).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (m).  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
CTS-V Only: Inspect supercharger drive  
belt. See footnote (m).  
If using DOT-4 brake fluid,  
change brake fluid at a regular  
maintenance service every two years.  
See footnote (j).  
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the  
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc  
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.  
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking  
brake, etc.  
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or  
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,  
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or  
on page 5-61 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on  
page 5-115 for more information.  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or  
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses  
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.  
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety  
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other  
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see  
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety  
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems  
on page 1-71.  
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if  
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all  
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as  
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all body  
door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including  
those for the hood, rear compartment, console door, and  
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may  
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.  
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean  
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick  
or squeak.  
(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and  
refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance  
service every two years. This service can be complex;  
you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service.  
See Brakes on page 5-44.  
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired  
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter  
may require replacement more often.  
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the  
filter at each engine oil change.  
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the  
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these  
conditions:  
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or  
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.  
(n) If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 (Code V) engine,  
replace the engine air cleaner filter every 40,000 miles  
(64 000 km).  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
(o) Drain, flush, and refill clutch hydraulic system  
at a regular maintenance service every two years.  
This service can be complex; you should have your  
dealer/retailer perform this service. Change fluid every  
25,000 miles (40 000 km) if the vehicle is used for high  
performance operation.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Uses such as high performance operation.  
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service  
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer  
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-31  
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,  
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure  
test the cooling system and pressure cap.  
(p) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system.  
This service can be complex; you should have your  
dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-31.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(q) During any maintenance, if a power washer is used  
to clean mud and dirt from the underbody, care should  
be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output  
seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and  
contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid  
will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be  
replaced.  
At Each Fuel Fill  
It is important to perform these underhood checks at  
each fuel fill.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil  
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to  
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause  
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
(r) Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly  
driven under one or more of these conditions:  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Uses such as high performance operation or taxi,  
Coolant Level Check  
police, or delivery service.  
Check the engine coolant level and, on CTS-V models,  
check the intercooler coolant level. Add DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-31.  
Owner Checks and Services  
These owner checks and services should be performed  
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,  
dependability, and emission control performance. Your  
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield  
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if  
necessary.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle.  
At Least Once a Month  
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-44.  
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make  
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.  
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to  
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the  
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only  
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in  
any other position, contact your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever  
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and  
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only  
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to  
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is  
not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
{ CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
Control System Check  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.  
For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition  
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift  
lever is in P (Park).  
{ CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
With the key access ignition system, the ignition  
key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. See  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a  
level surface.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-44.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if  
the vehicle begins to move.  
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying the  
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out  
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,  
set the parking brake.  
Parking Brake and Automatic  
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism  
Check  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With  
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),  
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake  
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking  
brake only.  
{ CAUTION:  
To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding  
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).  
Then release the parking brake followed by the  
regular brake.  
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could  
begin to move. You or others could be injured and  
property could be damaged. Make sure there is  
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should  
the vehicle begin to move.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care  
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other  
debris can collect.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-31.  
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit,  
check the sealant expiration date printed on the  
instruction label of the kit at least once a year.  
See your dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.  
Engine Coolant  
Intercooler  
System  
(6.2L V8  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Supercharged Coolant.  
Engine)  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,  
in Canada 89021320).  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part  
number, or specification can be obtained from your  
dealer/retailer.  
Hydraulic Brake  
System  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only  
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,  
Clutch System in Canada 88901244,  
Super DOT-4 brake fluid.  
The engine requires a special engine  
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.  
Oils meeting this standard can be  
identified as synthetic, and should  
also be identified with the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for  
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.  
However, not all synthetic API oils  
with the starburst symbol will meet  
this GM standard. Look for and use  
only an oil that meets GM Standard  
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,  
see Engine Oil on page 5-18.  
Hydraulic  
Chassis Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in  
Parking Brake  
Canada 88901242) or lubricant  
Cable Guides  
Engine Oil  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
GM Power Steering Fluid  
Power Steering  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,  
System  
in Canada 89021186).  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Manual  
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil  
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic  
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88862475,  
Axle Lubricant  
(CTS)  
Manual  
in Canada 88862476).  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,  
in Canada 89021678) meeting  
GM Specification 9986115.  
With a complete drain and  
refill add 4 ounces (118 ml) of  
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive  
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in  
Canada 992694) where required.  
See Rear Axle on page 5-54  
Rear Axle  
(Limited-Slip  
Differential)  
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,  
(CTS-V)  
Automatic  
Transmission Transmission Fluid.  
Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid  
(All-Wheel  
Drive)  
in Canada 88861801).  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861950,  
in Canada 88861951).  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Latch,  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic  
Axle Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,  
in Canada 89021678) meeting  
GM Specification 9986115.  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Floor Shift  
Linkage  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Hood and Door  
Hinges  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
Rear Axle  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
Part  
GM Part Numbers  
ACDelco Part Numbers  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
3.6L V6 Engine  
15875795  
25898499  
A3096C  
A3105C  
6.2L V8 Engine  
Engine Oil Filter  
3.6L V6 Engine  
25177917  
89017524  
19130403  
PF2129  
PF48  
6.2L V8 Engine  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element  
Spark Plugs  
CF133  
3.6L V6 Engine  
12597464  
12571165  
41-990  
41-104  
6.2L V8 Engine  
Wiper Blades  
Driver Side – 22 in (56.5 cm)  
Passenger Side – 21 in (53.3 cm)  
15890056  
15890057  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
CTS-V  
CTS  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and  
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional  
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should  
retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership  
management, it appears your concern cannot be  
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the  
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance  
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,  
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication  
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your  
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the  
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be  
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.  
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all  
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern  
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following  
steps should be taken:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in  
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the  
following information available to give the Customer  
Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is  
available from the vehicle registration or title,  
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel  
and visible through the windshield.  
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of  
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be  
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already  
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,  
contact the owner of the dealership or the general  
manager.  
Dealership name and location.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern  
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we  
suggest following Step One first.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors  
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are  
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,  
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following  
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can  
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line  
Program to enforce your rights.  
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the  
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following  
address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus  
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or  
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Although you may be required to resort to this informal  
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,  
use of the program is free of charge and your case will  
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree  
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and  
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
dr.bbb.org/goauto  
This program is available in all 50 states and the  
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,  
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves  
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or  
discontinue its participation in this program.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):  
For further information concerning eligibility in the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),  
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors  
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777  
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to  
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following  
address:  
General Motors Participation in the  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
In the event that you do not feel your concerns  
have been addressed after the following the procedure  
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of  
Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation  
in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General  
Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding  
arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related  
vehicle service claims. The program provides for the  
review of the facts involved by an impartial third party  
arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before  
the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire  
dispute settlement process, from the time you file your  
complaint to the final decision, should be completed in  
approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program  
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions  
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1–163–005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN).  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca  
Online Owner Center  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of  
www.gm.ca where you can save information on  
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy  
tools and forms with greater ease.  
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —  
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac  
Information and services customized for your specific  
vehicle — all in one convenient place.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you  
will have access to:  
Digital owner manual, warranty information,  
and more  
My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
Online service and maintenance records  
Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide  
Exclusive privileges and offers  
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address  
and phone number for each of your preferred GM  
dealers/retailers.  
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and  
service estimates, check trade-in values, or  
schedule a service appointment by adding the  
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.  
Recall notices for your specific vehicle  
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings  
summaries  
Other Helpful Links:  
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com  
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com  
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter  
FAQ  
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools  
and forms with greater ease.  
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within  
www.gm.ca.  
Contact Us  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
www.Cadillac.com  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
1-800-458-8006  
1-800-833-2622  
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or  
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),  
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer  
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate  
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).  
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)  
From Puerto Rico:  
1-800-496-9992 (English)  
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)  
From U.S. Virgin Islands:  
1-800-496-9994  
Canada — Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance Offices  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,  
CA1-163-005  
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes  
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be  
addressed to:  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
United States — Customer Assistance  
www.gmcanada.com  
1-888-446-2000  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
1-800-263-3830  
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overseas — Customer Assistance  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.  
Mexico, Central America and  
Caribbean Islands/Countries  
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin  
Islands) — Customer Assistance  
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.  
Customer Assistance Center  
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740  
Col. Lomas de Bezares  
This program, available to qualified applicants, can  
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible  
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,  
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.  
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.  
01-800-508-0000  
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800  
The offer is available for a very limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more  
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit  
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance  
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-9935.  
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.  
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.  
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Coverage  
Roadside Service  
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles  
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.  
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.  
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.  
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.  
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without  
permission from the owner is not covered.  
Calling for Assistance  
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of  
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes  
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at  
any time without notification.  
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following  
information ready:  
Your name, home address, and home telephone  
number  
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve  
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or  
driver if they decide the claims are made too often,  
or the same type of claim is made many times.  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
Model, year, color, and license plate number of  
the vehicle  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle  
Description of the problem  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump  
Cadillac Owner Privileges™  
start a dead battery.  
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel  
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North  
America are provided when requested either with  
the most direct route or the most scenic route.  
Additional travel information is also available.  
Allow three weeks for delivery.  
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.  
Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the  
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may  
be available if you have OnStar®. For security  
reasons, the driver must present identification  
before this service is given.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your  
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental  
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 year/  
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty  
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and  
rental car.  
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or  
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for  
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and  
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when  
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.  
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a  
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,  
must be in good condition and properly inflated.  
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement  
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cadillac Technician Roadside  
Service (U.S. only)  
Services Specific to Canadian  
Purchased Vehicles  
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately  
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.  
Propane and other fuels are not provided through  
this service.  
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than  
an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac  
owner in the United States with the advantage of  
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,  
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide  
on-site service.  
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.  
Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.  
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a  
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.  
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your  
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each  
technician travels with a specially equipped service  
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts  
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:  
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and  
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once  
authorization has been received, the Roadside  
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements  
and explain how to receive payment.  
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be  
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance  
advisor may give you permission to get local  
emergency road service. You will receive payment,  
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to  
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be  
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for  
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner  
responsibility.  
Services Not Included in Roadside  
Assistance  
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.  
Legal fines.  
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,  
chains, or other traction devices.  
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a  
non-public road or highway.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Several courtesy transportation options are available to  
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty  
repairs are required.  
Scheduling Service Appointments  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact  
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.  
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your  
service consultant of your transportation needs, your  
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.  
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty  
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with  
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage  
information.  
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be  
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is  
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,  
let them know this, and ask for instructions.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while  
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps  
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your dealer can offer you one of the following:  
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle  
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work  
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.  
Shuttle Service  
Courtesy Transportation  
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get  
you to your destination with minimal interruption of your  
daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip  
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)  
from the dealership.  
To enhance your ownership experience, we and  
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy  
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles  
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage  
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid  
specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet  
state, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.  
Requirements vary and may include minimum age  
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.  
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may  
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,  
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the  
completion of the repair.  
Public Transportation or Fuel  
Reimbursement  
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public  
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle  
service, the expense must be supported by original  
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount  
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for  
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation  
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for  
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim  
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported  
by original receipts. See your dealer for information  
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement  
of fuel or other transportation costs.  
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
Additional Program Information  
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be  
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer  
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy  
Transportation arrangements will be administered  
by appropriate dealer personnel.  
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy  
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that  
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.  
If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see  
your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed  
and the allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement  
must be supported by original receipts. This requires that  
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,  
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at  
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  
pursuant to the terms and conditions described  
herein at its sole discretion.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally  
designed appearance and safety performance, however,  
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not  
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and  
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.  
Collision Damage Repair  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is  
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified  
technician using the proper equipment and quality  
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs  
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety  
performance can be compromised in subsequent  
collisions.  
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are  
made by companies other than GM and may not have  
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may  
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,  
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.  
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related  
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.  
Collision Parts  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with  
the same materials and construction methods as the  
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine  
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that  
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety  
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help  
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
Repair Facility  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair  
facility that meets your needs before you ever need  
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a  
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and  
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a  
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians  
and comparable equipment.  
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for  
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles  
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the  
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the  
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Insuring Your Vehicle  
If a Crash Occurs  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality of  
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.  
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to  
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage  
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some  
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that  
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original  
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage  
is not available from your current insurance carrier,  
consider switching to another insurance carrier.  
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure you are  
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no  
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,  
is injured.  
If there has been an injury, call emergency services  
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all  
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle  
only if its position puts you in danger or you are  
instructed to move it by a police officer.  
Give only the necessary and requested information  
to police and other parties involved in the crash.  
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame  
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will  
help guard against post-crash legal action.  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may  
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with  
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)  
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.  
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged  
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside  
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-8 for  
more information.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of  
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces  
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be  
necessary. This is especially true if there are no  
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the  
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the  
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,  
the service’s name, and the phone number.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is  
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance  
information and registration if you keep these items  
in your vehicle.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your  
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer  
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,  
make sure you are comfortable with them.  
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable  
with their work for a long time.  
Gather the important information you will need from  
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone  
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license  
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description of the  
damage to the other vehicle.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and  
make sure you understand what work will be  
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,  
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome  
this opportunity.  
If possible, call your insurance company from the  
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the  
information they will need. If they ask for a police  
report, phone or go to the police department  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair  
Process  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,  
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.  
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take  
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the  
facility that any required replacement collision parts be  
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts  
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts  
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
in addition to notifying General Motors.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must  
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,  
your insurance company may initially value the repair  
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair  
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember  
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the  
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your  
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open  
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect  
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall  
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot  
become involved in individual problems between  
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle  
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236  
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for  
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair  
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision  
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with  
that company. In such cases, you can have control of  
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within  
reasonable limits.  
Administrator, NHTSA  
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.  
Washington D.C., 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your  
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada  
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of  
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Service Manuals  
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,  
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
Service Bulletins  
Service Bulletins give additional technical service  
information needed to knowledgeably service  
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin  
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis  
and service of your vehicle.  
Reporting Safety Defects to  
General Motors  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in  
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.  
Owner Information  
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:  
Owner publications are written specifically for owners  
and intended to provide basic operational information  
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the  
Maintenance Schedule for all models.  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and  
Warranty Booklet.  
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.  
Canadian Cadillac Customer  
Communication Centre, CA1-163-005  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Current and Past Model Order Forms  
Vehicle Data Recording and  
Privacy  
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available  
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request  
an order form, specify year and model name of  
the vehicle.  
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated  
computers that record information about the vehicle’s  
performance and how it is driven. For example, your  
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control  
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the  
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags  
in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking  
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules  
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician  
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data  
about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel  
consumption or average speed. These modules may also  
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio  
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.  
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123  
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM  
Eastern Time  
For Credit Card Orders Only  
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.  
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com  
Or you can write to:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
Prices are subject to change without notice and without  
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.  
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are  
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make  
checks payable in U.S. funds.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle  
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is  
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions  
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash  
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type  
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a  
crash investigation.  
Event Data Recorders  
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).  
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain  
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag  
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist  
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.  
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,  
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is  
designed to record such data as:  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment  
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR  
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,  
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the  
special equipment, can read the information if they have  
access to the vehicle or the EDR.  
How various systems in your vehicle were operating  
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts  
were buckled/fastened  
GM will not access this data or share it with others  
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,  
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the  
accelerator and/or brake pedal  
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;  
in response to an official request of police or similar  
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation  
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.  
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for  
GM research needs or may be made available to others  
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the  
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.  
How fast the vehicle was traveling  
This data can help provide a better understanding of the  
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar®  
Radio Frequency  
Identification (RFID)  
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the  
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms  
and Conditions for information on data collection  
and use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-57  
in this manual for more information.  
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions  
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system  
security, as well as in connection with conveniences  
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and  
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door  
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use  
or record personal information or link with any other GM  
system containing personal information.  
Navigation System  
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the  
system may result in the storage of destinations,  
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip  
information. Refer to the navigation system operating  
manual for information on stored data and for deletion  
instructions.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth® .................................................... 3-109  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning (cont.)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine (cont.)  
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-43  
StabiliTrak® /Traction Control System (TCS)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-14  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-57  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power (cont.)  
P
Bluetooth® ................................................ 3-109  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-14  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6  
StabiliTrak®/TCS Warning Light ......................... 3-40  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box TV Video Accessories 1121A User Manual
Black Decker Fryer SKG110 User Manual
Black Decker Oven TRO390B User Manual
Califone Projector PA300+ Wired User Manual
Chamberlain Garage Door Opener PD752D User Manual
Changhong Electric Projection Television 51DLP31AW User Manual
Chauvet Stroller 168 User Manual
Chauvet Work Light LED Followspot 75 User Manual
Chevrolet Automobile 2011 Traverse User Manual
Chromalox Thermostat 3001E User Manual